JP7073687B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

It is known that a game machine such as a pachinko machine grants a privilege such as paying out a game ball based on a ball entry means provided in the game area or a game ball entering the ball entry portion. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-074175

Here, in a gaming machine, a device for increasing the degree of attention to a game is desired.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of attention to gaming.

The present invention
A launching means that can launch a game ball based on a predetermined launch operation,
The first and second ball entry means on which the game ball can enter, and the second ball entry means ,
The first state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter into the first ball entry means , and the second state in which the game ball can enter into the first entry means or is easier to enter than the first state. Movable body that can be switched to and
A switching control means for executing switching control in which the movable body is changed from the first state to the second state and then changed to the first state in a predetermined case.
Equipped with
It has a ball receiving means capable of receiving a game ball in a situation where the movable body is at least in the first state.
The second ball entry means is arranged in a predetermined area below the ball receiving means.
It is configured so that the entry of the game ball into the second entry means can be restricted in the situation where the movable body is in the first state.
When the movable body is switched from the first state to the second state in a situation where the ball receiving means receives the predetermined game ball, the predetermined game ball in the ball receiving means is the ball receiving means. It is configured so that it can flow downwards.
The predetermined game ball that has flowed down below the ball receiving means can enter the second ball entering means .

According to the present invention, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main composition of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a perspective view which shows the main composition of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged view of FIG. 4 showing an enlarged view of the variable winning device and its peripheral configuration. (A) is a front view of the variable winning device and its peripheral configuration, and (b) and (c) are sectional views of the variable winning device. It is a perspective view of the variable winning device and its peripheral configuration. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display contents on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display contents on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed in MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game time control process. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big prize opening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of a game in a normal game state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the game in the opening / closing execution mode. It is a front view which shows the variable prize-winning apparatus and its peripheral structure in the modification 1 of the 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the shutter in a variable winning apparatus. (A) is a front view of the variable winning device and its peripheral configuration in the second embodiment, and (b) and (c) are sectional views of the variable winning device. (A) is a perspective view of the variable winning device and its peripheral configuration, and (b) is a plan view showing a rear surface portion of the opening / closing door. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game in the normal game state, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game in the open / close execution mode. (A) is a front view of the variable winning device and its peripheral configuration in the third embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view thereof. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a variable winning device, and (b) is a plan view of an opening / closing member and its peripheral configuration. It is a perspective view of the variable winning device and its peripheral configuration. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the modification of the 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the announcement effect control process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the announcement effect. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game in the opening / closing execution mode. It is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus in an open state in the modification 1 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus in a closed state in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in the open state A, and (b) is a plan view thereof. It is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus in an open state B. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the distribution table, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type and the open state of the variable winning device. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device during one round game in the modified example 1 of the fourth embodiment, and (b) and (c) explain another example thereof. It is explanatory drawing for. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between each round and the opening / closing pattern of a variable winning apparatus in the modification 2 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the opening / closing member in the modification 3 of the 4th embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the operation mode of an opening / closing member. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the jackpot type and the open state of each round in the modified example 4 of the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the jackpot type and the open state A in the open / close execution mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship with the number of times of switching. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating another example of the modification 4 of the 4th Embodiment. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the jackpot type and the open state in the 15th round in the modified example 5 of the fourth embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining another example thereof. Is. (A) is a front view of the variable winning unit and its peripheral configuration in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the variable winning unit. It is sectional drawing of the variable winning unit. It is a perspective view of the opening / closing member in the sixth embodiment. It is a side view of the opening / closing member. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the operation mode of the opening / closing member in the opening / closing execution mode. (A) is a front view of the variable winning device and its peripheral configuration in the first modification of the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a perspective view of the opening / closing member. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of a variable winning device corresponding to the cross section taken along line AA of FIG. 51 (a). FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of a variable winning device corresponding to the cross section taken along line AA of FIG. 51 (a). (A) is a front view of the winning unit and its peripheral configuration in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view taken along line BB of (a). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table. It is a figure which shows another example of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows another example of the flow path forming part. It is a figure which shows another example of the flow path forming part. It is a figure which shows another example of a gaming machine.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a kind of gaming machine, will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded manner. Note that, in FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration in the gaming area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

The pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right sides as the support side. Further, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with one of the left and right side portions as the support side. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with one of the left and right side portions as the support side.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at the rotating tip portion thereof, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so as not to be openable. It has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

The front door frame 14 provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire area of the game area, which will be described later, can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this, and may be formed colorless and transparent by synthetic resin.

Light emitting means such as various lamp portions are provided around the window portion 61. A display light emitting unit 63 is provided above the window unit 61 as a part of the various lamp units. Further, on both the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 63, speaker units 64 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game situation are provided.

Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 bulging toward the front side are arranged side by side. An upper plate 71 opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65, and a lower plate 72 also opened upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66. The upper plate 71 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 96 provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 53 side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 72 has a function of storing the surplus game balls in the upper plate 71.

A firing handle 60 is provided on the right side of the lower plate 72 in the front door frame 14. By operating the firing handle 60, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 53 provided below the game area PE in the inner frame 13 toward the game area PE. In this case, by changing the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 60, the firing intensity of the gaming ball launched toward the gaming area PE, that is, the firing momentum is changed.

The game area PE is formed on the game board 24 mounted on the inner frame 13. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 24.

The game board 24 has a plate shape, and an inner rail portion 51 and an outer rail portion 52 are attached to the surface (front surface) thereof. The game area PE is formed so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52. Further, the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52 form a guide rail 54 for the game ball to the game area PE, and the game launched from the game ball launch mechanism 53 by the player rotating the launch handle 60. The ball is guided to the upper part of the game area PE by the guide rail 54.

The guide rail 54 is formed so that its exit portion faces the upper center of the game area PE on one side of the game area PE. Therefore, as the amount of rotation of the firing handle 60 by the player increases, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area PE is from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 54 is formed to the opposite side. It shifts to the side of the side. The outlet portion of the guide rail 54 is provided on the left side portion of the game area PE.

In the range defined as the game area PE in the game board 24, a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed by being subjected to router processing. Each opening has a general winning opening 31 (see FIG. 5), an upper operating port (first starting ball entry section) 33, a lower operating opening (second starting ball entry section) 34, a variable winning device 201, and a through gate 35. A variable display unit 36, a main display unit 43, an accessory display unit 44, and the like are provided.

When a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the upper operating port 33, the lower operating port 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 201, the detection sensors provided corresponding to each (general winning opening sensor 31e, It is detected by the upper working opening winning sensor 33b, the lower working opening winning sensor 34c, the through winning sensor 35a, and the large winning opening winning sensor 202a). Then, when the entry into the general winning opening 31, the upper operating opening 33, the lower operating opening 34, and the variable winning device 201 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In this case, when the entry into the upper operating port 33 is detected, three prize balls are paid out, and when the entry into the lower operating port 34 is detected, the two prize balls are paid out. When the payout is executed and the entry into the general winning opening 31 is detected, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when the entry into the variable winning device 201 is detected, 15 prizes are awarded. The ball is paid out.

The number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls related to the lower operating port 34 may be larger than the number of prize balls related to the upper operating port 33, or the number of prize balls of both operating ports 33 and 34 may be larger. The number may be the same. Further, the number of prize balls related to the variable winning device 201 may be smaller than the number of prize balls related to the operating openings 33 and 34, or may be the same as the number of prize balls of both operating ports 33 and 34. However, in order to maintain the superiority of winning the variable winning device 201, it is preferable that the number of prize balls related to the variable winning device 201 is larger than the number of prize balls related to the operating ports 33 and 34. In addition, the number of prize balls related to the general winning opening 31 may be the same as or larger than the number of prize balls related to the variable winning device 201. As will be described later, the general winning opening 31 is a ball entry section that has nothing to do with the game in which the big hit lottery, which is the core of the game, or the game during the big hit is performed. It can be said that the ball plays an auxiliary role in playing this core game. In that respect, the larger the number of prize balls related to the general winning opening 31 (or the more likely it is that the winning balls enter the general winning opening 31), the less the number of balls held in playing a game such as a big hit lottery. It is possible to reduce the number of prize balls or increase the total number of prize balls obtained.

In addition, the game board 24 is provided with an out opening, and the game ball that does not enter the various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area PE through the out opening. Further, in the game board 24, a large number of game nails 38 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (roles) such as a windmill are arranged. ..

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through the predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening, but also the game area PE after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the flow of the game area PE is continued without being discharged from the game area PE. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of the game ball into the out opening, the game to the general winning opening 31, the upper operating opening 33, the lower operating opening 34, the through gate 35, or the variable winning device 201. The entry of a ball is also referred to as a prize. Of the general winning opening 31, the upper operating opening 33, the lower operating opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 201, the through gate 35 is configured to return the winning game ball to the gaming area PE again. On the other hand, the other winning units 31, 33, 34, 201 guide the winning game ball to the back side of the game board 24 so as not to return it to the game area PE (do not re-enter the other winning units or the out openings). It is configured.

The variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PE. Since the peripheral edge of the variable display unit 36 protrudes in front of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, the area where the game ball can flow down is divided into a plurality of areas.

Specifically, the upper region PE1 which is a region above the predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36 in the game region PE, and the upper region PE1 which is continuously below the variable display unit 36 and the variable display unit 36. The left region PE2, which is the left region, the right region PE3, which is a region to the right of the variable display unit 36 and is continuous below the upper region PE1, and the left region PE2 and the right region PE3, respectively. On the other hand, it is continuously partitioned below the variable display unit 36 into a lower region PE4 which is a region below the variable display unit 36.

Which region of each of these regions PE1 to PE4 the gaming region flows down (passes) is defined by the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 60, that is, the launching force of the gaming ball. Specifically, when the player performs the rotation operation of the launch handle 60 with the rotation operation amount in the first range which is equal to or more than the predetermined rotation amount and less than the reference rotation amount as the first launch operation, the firing is performed. The game ball is more likely to be launched to the left of the lateral center position in the upper region PE1. In this case, the game ball flows down the game area PE in the order of the upper area PE1 → the left side area PE2 → the lower area PE4.

On the other hand, when the player performs the rotation operation of the launch handle 60 with the rotation operation amount in the second range which is equal to or larger than the reference rotation amount as the second launch operation, the launched game ball is laterally oriented in the upper region PE1. It is easier to launch to the right than the center position of. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PE1 → the right region PE3 → the lower region PE4. That is, by adjusting the amount of rotation of the firing handle 60, whether the game ball plays on the left route flowing down the left region PE2 or the game ball plays on the right route flowing down the right region PE3. , It is possible for the player to select.

The reference rotation amount is a rotation operation amount at which the ratio of the game ball flowing down the left side region PE2 and the ratio of the game ball flowing down the right side region PE3 are the same or substantially the same, and the predetermined rotation amount. Is the amount of rotation operation that enables the launched game ball to pass through the guide rail 54 and enter the game area PE. In the rotation operation amount in the first range, the ratio of the game ball flowing down the left side region PE2 is high, and in the rotation operation amount in the second range, the ratio of the game ball flowing down in the right side region PE3 is high.

The upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are opened upward. Further, both actuation ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction, in detail, in the vertical direction so that the upper actuating port 33 faces upward. The game ball can reach the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 regardless of whether the player performs the first firing operation or the second firing operation. The lower operating port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 34a is in an open state (support state or guide state) that allows the ball to enter the lower operating port 34, and a closed state that makes it more difficult or impossible to enter the lower operating port 34 than in the open state. It is configured to be switchable to (non-supported state or non-guided state). Here, the electric accessory 34a will be supplementarily described.

The operating port case 33a constituting the upper operating port 33 projects toward the front side and has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and the upper side length <lower side length. At this time, the upper side length of the operating port case 33a (that is, the left-right width of the upper operating port 33) is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the lower side length is the case where the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. The length is larger than the distance between the left and right electric accessories 34a. Further, when the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the distance between the operating ports 33 and 34 is set so that the distance between the operating port case 33a and the upper end of the electric accessory 34a is slightly shorter than the diameter of the game ball. Has been adjusted.

According to the above configuration, the game ball cannot win the lower operating opening 34 in the closed state of the electric accessory 34a, and the lower operating opening 34 can be won by opening the electric accessory 34a. In particular, at this time, during the operation in which the electric accessory 34a shifts from the closed state to the open state, the operating port case 33a of the upper operating port 33 has a substantially trapezoidal shape as described above, which becomes an obstacle. Until the accessory 34a is sufficiently opened, it is impossible to win a prize in the lower operating port 34, and the prize can be won only when the electric accessory 34a is almost fully opened. That is, the game ball that has fallen from above hits the side surface of the operating port case 33a and is repelled to the outside, and does not directly win the lower operating opening 34. As a result, when the electric accessory 34a is opened in a very short time, it becomes extremely difficult to win a prize in the lower operating port 34, and only when the open state of the electric accessory 34a is continued, the lower operating port 34 is entered. Winning will be easier.

In addition to the configuration in which the actuating port case 33a of the upper actuating port 33 has a substantially trapezoidal shape as described above, the actuating port case 33a of the upper actuating port 33 may have a two-stage configuration of a narrow upper part and a wide lower part, or an actuating port. An obstacle nail may be planted diagonally below the case 33a.

The variable winning device 201 is installed in the lower region PE 4 in the game board 24, and more specifically, is installed in the central portion in the left-right direction at the lowermost portion of the game region PE. The variable winning device 201 includes a large winning opening 202 (see FIG. 7B) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and also includes an opening / closing door 203 for opening and closing the large winning opening 202. The opening / closing door 203 is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win, and the game ball is likely to win a prize when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode (opening / closing execution state) is won in the internal lottery. It can be switched to the open state.

Here, the open / close execution mode is a mode in which the transition is made when a big hit or a special loss is won. The open / close execution mode will be described in detail later. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 201, the variable winning device 201 is repeatedly opened with a predetermined time (for example, 30 sec) elapsed or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. There is an aspect to be done.

Flow path forming portions 131 and 161 are installed on both left and right sides of the lower region PE4 so as to sandwich the variable winning device 201. The left side flow path forming portion 131 forms a game ball flow path through which the game ball passing through the left side region PE2 can flow down, and the right side flow path forming portion 161 forms a game ball flowing down through the right side region PE3. It forms a possible game ball flow path. These flow path forming portions 131 and 161 are configured to guide the game balls flowing down each region of the left side region PE2 and the right side region PE3 to the variable winning device 201, and are formed of a colorless transparent or colored transparent synthetic resin. There is.

Both the flow path forming portions 131 and 161 project from the front surface of the gaming board 24 to the front of the gaming machine, and the front surface thereof faces the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14. The distance between the front surface of each flow path forming portion 131, 161 and the window panel 62 is narrower than that of one game ball, and the game ball cannot pass in front of the flow path forming portions 131, 161. It has become. Therefore, a part of the outer edge of the game area PE (specifically, the outer edge of the lower left and the lower right of the game area PE) is partitioned by the flow path forming portions 131 and 161. The front surfaces of the flow path forming portions 131 and 161 are appropriately shaped and colored, and are decorated.

The right flow path forming unit 161 is provided with a main display unit 43 and a accessory display unit 44. The main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the right side flow path forming unit 161. That is, the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and the game ball can be seen in front of both the display units 43 and 44. It is prevented from falling.

The main display unit 43 has a round display unit RS for clearly indicating the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode when the open / close execution mode is set (or the open / close execution mode is set) as a result of the internal lottery. The first result display unit AS for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the operating port 33, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 34. The second result display unit BS of the above is set.

The round display unit RS starts displaying the number of rounds at the start of the open / close execution mode, and ends the display at the end of the open / close execution mode.

In the first result display unit AS, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the upper operating port 33, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 is performed. The result is clearly indicated by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the first result display unit AS and is displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the second result display unit BS, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the lower operating port 34, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 34 is performed. The result is clearly indicated by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the lower operating port 34 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the second result display unit BS and the variation is displayed. After is stopped, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

Here, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 33 and 34, the variation display is started on the corresponding result display units AS and BS, the predetermined stop result is displayed, and the variation display is stopped. It corresponds to one game. However, one game round is not limited to the above content, and for example, a single result display unit is provided, and even if a prize is awarded to any of the actuation ports 33 and 34, the single result display unit is provided. In the configuration in which the variation display is performed in the result display unit, the variation display is started in the single result display unit, and the game is played until the variation display is stopped while the predetermined stop result is displayed. It will be once.

The accessory display unit 44 is a display unit for clearly showing the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35. In this case, the accessory display unit 44 performs a variable display of the pattern triggered by winning a prize in the through gate 35, and as a result of stopping the variable display, an internal lottery performed based on the winning in the through gate 35 is performed. The result of is specified by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through gate 35 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 and is displayed in a variable manner. After it is stopped, it shifts to the electric service open state. In the electric service open state, the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower actuating port 34 is in the open state in a predetermined manner.

The main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are composed of a segment display device having a plurality of segments, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may be used. May be good.

The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 for variable display (or variable display or switching display) of a symbol which is a kind of symbol. Further, in the variable display unit 36, a center frame 42 is arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 41. The upper portion of the center frame 42 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display screen of the symbol display device 41, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen is not deteriorated due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. ..

The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

On the symbol display device 41, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the upper, middle, and lower directions, and these symbols are variably displayed so as to be scrolled in the left-right direction. In this case, the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is started based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. That is, when the variable display is performed on the main display unit 43, the variable display is performed on the symbol display device 41 accordingly. Then, for example, the game times for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 15 rounds in which the large winning opening 202 of the variable winning device 201 is opened 15 times as the opening / closing execution mode are preset in the symbol display device 41. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the valid line.

A first reserved light emitting unit 45 corresponding to the first result display unit AS and the symbol display device 41 is provided on the upper left portion on the front surface side of the center frame 42. The number of game balls that have won a prize in the upper operating port 33 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the first reserved light emitting unit 45. Further, in the upper right portion on the front side of the center frame 42, a second reserved light emitting unit 46 corresponding to the second result display unit BS and the symbol display device 41 is provided. The number of game balls that have won a prize in the lower operating port 34 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the second reserved light emitting unit 46. As described above, since the upper part of the center frame 42 extends to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the visibility of the first reserved light emitting unit 45 and the second reserved light emitting unit 46 is not hindered by the falling of the gaming ball. ing.

At the lower part of the center frame 42, a third reserved light emitting unit 47 corresponding to the accessory display unit 44 is provided. The number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved games is displayed by lighting the third reserved light emitting unit 47. It should be noted that each of the reserved light emitting units 45 to 47 may be configured to be displayed by a part of the symbol display device 41.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 81 and an effect control device 82 are mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

The main control device 81 includes a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game (main control circuit) and a function of monitoring the power supply (power failure monitoring circuit), and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a substrate box 83 made of the above. The board box 83 includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are inseparably connected by a box coupling portion 85 as a separation preventing means (or a coupling means), whereby the substrate box 83 is sealed. Since they are inseparably connected by the box coupling portions 85, the substrate box 83 needs to be destroyed or partially cut when the internal space of the substrate box 83 is opened. A plurality of box coupling portions 85 are provided on the long side portions of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used to perform the coupling processing.

Any configuration can be applied to the box joint portion 85 as long as the box base and the box cover cannot be opened, but by inserting a locking claw into the elongated hole constituting the box joint portion 85, the box base can be connected to the box base. It is designed so that it cannot be opened with the box cover. The joining process by the box joining portion 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the joining, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if the illegal opening is performed. Even after opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one elongated hole among the plurality of box coupling portions 85. When the board box 83 is opened, such as when a defect occurs in the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box coupling portion 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box coupling portion 85 are used. Cut the connecting part of the box and the connecting part with the box body. As a result, the box base of the board box 83 and the box cover are separated, and the internal main control board can be taken out. After that, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the elongated hole of the other box coupling portion 85. If the history of opening the board box 83 is left in the board box 83, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 83 has been opened illegally by looking at the board box 83.

A plurality of bonding pieces 86 are provided on one short side of the board box 83 so as to project to the side thereof. These coupling pieces 86 have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of coupled pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main control device 81, and the coupling piece 86 and the coupling piece 87 form a board box 83 and a mounting base. The binding process is performed between.

As a trace means for detecting the unauthorized opening of the board box 83, a sealing sticker may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the seal sticker is peeled off from the affixed portion, the adhesive layer of the seal sticker remains on the substrate box 83 side, and a trace thereof remains. Further, the seal seal is provided with an IC tag that transmits a response wave containing identification information to a ring wave of a predetermined frequency, and when the seal seal is removed, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the response is described above. It may be configured so that the transmission of waves is impossible.

The staging control device 82 includes a staging control board that controls voice, lamp display, and a display control device (not shown) according to instructions from the main control device 81, and the staging control board is a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. It is housed and configured in 84.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, and a payout mechanism unit 92 and a control device collective unit 93 are attached to the back pack 91. The back pack 91 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81, the staging control device 82, and the like from the rear. ing.

The payout mechanism unit 92 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover unit 94, and is a tank 95 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game field are sequentially replenished, and a game stored in the tank 95. It is equipped with a payout device 96 for paying out balls. The game ball paid out from the payout device 96 is discharged to the upper plate 71 or the lower plate 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. Further, the payout mechanism unit 92 is mounted with a back pack board provided with a power switch for turning on and off the power supply, for example, while supplying a main power supply of AC 24 volts.

Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal 99 on the rotation shaft side of the back pack unit 15 and on the upper edge side. The external output terminal 99 includes an output terminal for outputting a signal when the number of game balls is insufficient in the tank 95 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. An output terminal for outputting a signal each time it is rented, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and a state transition such as an opening / closing execution mode. An output terminal for outputting a signal (or while transitioning to a state) is provided. Then, through these output terminals, a signal regarding the state on the frame side is output to the management control device on the game hall side. It should be noted that an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of game balls are rented is not required in a so-called cash machine.

The control device collective unit 93 includes a payout control device 97, a power supply, and a launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 and the power supply and launch control device 98 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 97 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

The payout control device 97 is configured by accommodating a payout control board that controls the payout device 96 in a board box. In this case, the same fraud suppression means as the board box 83 of the main control device 81 may be applied to the board box of the payout control device 97.

The power supply and launch control device 98 is configured by accommodating a power supply and a launch control board in a substrate box, and the substrate generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by various control devices and the like, and is further determined by a player. The launch of the game ball is controlled by operating the firing handle 60. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a storage and retention function for various data, and can maintain the state at the time of a power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and can return to the state at the time of a power failure when recovering from the power failure. It has become like.

<Flower path forming portions 131, 161 and variable winning device 201>
In the present embodiment, the flow path forming portions 131, 161 and the variable winning device 201 and related configurations are characteristic. Therefore, the flow path forming portions 131 and 161, the variable winning device 201, and the configurations related thereto will be supplementarily described below with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7. 5 is a partially enlarged view of FIG. 4 showing an enlarged view of the variable winning device 201 and its peripheral configuration, FIG. 6A is a front view of the variable winning device 201, and FIGS. 6B and 5C are variable winning devices. A sectional view of 201 and FIG. 7 are perspective views of the variable winning device 201 and its peripheral configuration.

First, the left side flow path forming portion 131 will be described with reference to FIG. The left flow path forming portion 131 is arranged along the inner rail portion 51 in the left portion of the lower region PE4. As described above, the left flow path forming portion 131 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 24, and the game ball cannot flow down in front of the left flow path forming portion 131. The upper surface portion 132 of the left side flow path forming portion 131 is a rolling surface on which the game ball can roll, and forms a flow path that guides the game ball to the left and right center sides of the lower region PE4.

The upper surface portion 132 is formed with a step in the vertical direction, and is divided into a first inclined portion 133 on the upstream side and a second inclined portion 136 on the downstream side. The first inclined portion 133 has an inclined shape that descends to the right side in the front view, and forms a left first flow path that leads out the game ball that has flowed down the left side region PE2 toward the left side game nail group 134. The left side game nail group 134 is composed of a plurality of game nails 38 arranged substantially linearly between the first inclined portion 133 and the lower operating port 34 arranged above the variable winning device 201. , A guide path capable of guiding the game ball from the first inclined portion 133 to the lower operating port 34 is formed.

A gap 135 through which one game ball can pass is formed between the first inclined portion 133 and the left side game nail group 134, and at an intermediate position of the left side game nail group 134, and through these gaps 135. The game ball can be dropped. Below the gap 135, general winning openings 31a and 31b that open upward are arranged, and one game ball can be won in each of these general winning openings 31a and 31b. A plurality of game nails 38 are arranged between the gap 135 and the general winning openings 31a and 31b, and the game balls dropped from the gap 135 are randomly distributed by these game nails 38. Therefore, the game ball that has fallen from the gap 135 may or may not win the general winning openings 31a and 31b. In the present embodiment, two general winning openings 31 are arranged, but the number of general winning openings 31 is arbitrary and may be one or three or more. ..

The second inclined portion 136 has an inclined shape that descends to the right side in the front view, and the most downstream portion (terminal portion) thereof is open toward the variable winning device 201. The second inclined portion 136 is arranged below the general winning openings 31a and 31b, and has a second left flow path for leading the game ball that did not win in the general winning openings 31a and 31b toward the variable winning device 201. Is forming.

The step is formed between the second inclined portion 136 and the first inclined portion 133, and the first vertical wall portion 137 connecting both the inclined portions 133 and 136 is formed. The first vertical wall portion 137 extends in the vertical direction, and a left third flow path through which one game ball can pass is formed between the first vertical wall portion 137 and the general winning opening 31a. .. Therefore, when the game ball dropped from the gap 135 passes through the left side of the general winning opening 31a, the game ball can reach the second inclined portion 136 through the third flow path.

In the present embodiment, the second inclined portion 136 is continuous with the lower end portion of the first vertical wall portion 137 and is the most downstream portion from the connection portion with the first vertical wall portion 137 (the end portion on the variable winning device 201 side). There is no loophole for the game ball such as the out opening. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the third flow path on the left side and the game ball that has fallen on the second inclined portion 136 are all led out to the variable winning device 201 side. The rolling surface of the game ball in the first inclined portion 133 and the second inclined portion 136 is formed into a flat surface without unevenness, so that the game ball can be smoothly rolled (flowed down).

Further, a plurality of game nails 38 are arranged in the area PE4a between the lower operating port 34 and the variable winning device 201 and the area PE4b between the left game nail group 134 and the variable winning device 201. The game nail 38 is laid out so as to guide the game ball flowing into the regions PE4a and PE4b to the variable winning device 201. Therefore, the game balls that flow down through the sides of the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 and the game balls that have fallen from the gap 135 and flowed into the region PE4b all flow down to the variable winning device 201 side. If the game balls in the areas PE4a and PE4b flow down toward the variable winning device 201, the game nails 38 in these areas may be omitted, or the game nails 38 may be replaced with synthetic resin passage members (guidance). A member) may be provided.

A second vertical wall portion 138 extending downward (inner rail portion 51) is provided at the most downstream portion of the second inclined portion 136. An out port 141 through which a game ball can enter is provided in the upper part of the second vertical wall portion 138, and the game ball that has entered the out port 141 is guided to the back side of the game board 24 and is a game area. It is discharged from PE. The out port 141 is open in the lateral direction (right side) of the gaming machine, and its size is such that one gaming ball can pass through.

At least in the front portion of the left side flow path forming portion 131 in the out port 141 and its peripheral portion, that is, in the front portion of the left side flow path forming portion 131, at least the game balls that have entered the out port 141 and the out port 141 are played on the game board 24. The part of the pachinko machine that overlaps with the guide passage leading to the back side from the front of the gaming machine is decorated with a predetermined decoration such as plating or a seal, and is colored. On the other hand, the second inclined portion 136, which is the rolling surface of the game ball, does not have such coloring, and the above portion has a lower light transmittance than the second inclined portion 136. As a result, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the flow of the gaming ball that has entered the opening of the out opening 141 or the out opening 141 is invisible or difficult to see. That is, the out port 141 has a structure in which the visibility is lower than that of other ball entry portions (for example, the variable winning device 201) and is inconspicuous.

At that time, a display suggesting or clearly indicating the out port 141 is shown on the front surface of the left flow path forming portion 131 in the out port 141 and its peripheral portion so that the player, the hall employee, etc. can grasp the existence of the out port 141 ( For example, "OUT") may be provided. In addition, instead of the configuration of coloring the above portion, the portion is formed of an opaque material or a material having a lower light transmittance than the second inclined portion 136, thereby reducing the visibility of the out port 141. good.

Incidentally, the left flow path forming portion 131 itself is formed of a transparent synthetic resin and has translucency, as described above. Therefore, by arranging a light emitting board on which a plurality of light emitting elements capable of emitting light toward the front of the gaming machine or the side of the gaming machine (up / down / left / right) are arranged behind the left flow path forming portion 131. For example, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect such as illuminating the second inclined portion 136 brightly.

Next, the right side flow path forming portion 161 will be described. The upper surface portion 162 of the right side flow path forming portion 161 is a rolling surface on which the game ball can roll, and forms a flow path that guides the game ball to the left and right center sides of the lower region PE4. The upper surface portion 162 of the right side flow path forming portion 161 is symmetrical with the upper surface portion 132 of the left side flow path forming portion 131, and has a first inclined portion 163, a second inclined portion 166, and a first vertical wall portion 167. is doing.

The first inclined portion 163 has an inclined shape that descends to the left side in the front view, and forms a right side first flow path for leading the game ball flowing down the right side region PE3 toward the right side game nail group 164. The right side game nail group 164 forms a guide path that can guide the game ball to the lower operating port 34, and is located between the first inclined portion 163 and the right side game nail group 164, and in the middle of the right side game nail group 164. Is formed with a gap 165 through which one game ball can pass. Further, below the gap 165, general winning openings 31c and 31d that open upward are arranged, and a game ball that has fallen from the gap 165 can win a prize in the general winning openings 31c and 31d.

The second inclined portion 166 has an inclined shape that descends to the left side in the front view, and forms a second right flow path for leading the game ball toward the variable winning device 201. The second inclined portion 166 is arranged below the general winning openings 31c and 31d, and leads the game balls that did not win in the general winning openings 31c and 31d to the variable winning device 201. The first vertical wall portion 167 is connected to the first inclined portion 163 and the second inclined portion 166, and forms a right third flow path through which one game ball can pass between the general winning opening 31d. is doing.

In the present embodiment, the second inclined portion 166 is continuous with the lower end portion of the first vertical wall portion 167, and from the connection portion with the first vertical wall portion 167 to the terminal portion (the end portion on the variable winning device 201 side). There is no loophole for the game ball such as the out opening between the two. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the third flow path on the right side and the game ball that has fallen on the second inclined portion 166 are all led out to the variable winning device 201 side. The rolling surface of the game ball in the first inclined portion 163 and the second inclined portion 166 is a flat surface without unevenness, so that the game ball can be smoothly rolled (flowed down).

In the area PE4c between the right side game nail group 164 and the variable winning device 201, a plurality of game nails 38 for guiding the game ball flowing into the area PE4c to the variable winning device 201 are provided, and the area falls from the gap 165 and falls into the area. All the game balls that have flowed into the PE4c flow down toward the variable winning device 201. If the game ball in the area PE4c flows down toward the variable winning device 201, the game nail 38 in the area PE4c may be omitted, or a passage member (guide member) made of synthetic resin may be used instead of the game nail 38. It may be provided.

A second vertical wall portion 168 extending downward (inner rail portion 51) is provided at the most downstream portion of the second inclined portion 166. An out port 171 for discharging a game ball from the game area PE is provided on the upper portion of the second vertical wall portion 168. The out port 171 is open in the lateral direction (left side) of the gaming machine, and its size is such that one gaming ball can pass through. The height position of the out port 171 is the same as the out port 141 of the left flow path forming portion 131, and the out ports 141 and 171 face each other with the variable winning device 201 interposed therebetween. Further, as in the case of the out port 141, the out port 171 has an opaque front surface of the right side flow path forming portion 161 in the out port 171 and its peripheral portion, so that visibility from the front of the gaming machine can be obtained. It is lower than the ball part. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, no out port other than the out ports 141 and 171 is provided.

Next, the variable winning device 201 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6A, an opening 207 that penetrates the game board 24 in the thickness direction is provided at the lowermost position of the game board 24. The variable winning device 201 includes a plate-shaped base body 211, and is attached to the game board 24 by fitting the base body 211 into the opening 207.

The distance between the front surface portion 211a of the base body 211 and the window panel 62 is larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a passage portion 208 through which the game ball can pass is formed in front of the front surface portion 211a. There is. The passage portion 208 is configured to include a side wall portion 213 formed of the second vertical wall portions 138 and 168 of the flow path forming portions 131 and 161 and a bottom portion 214 formed of the inner rail portion 51. A large winning opening 202 is formed in the upper part (see FIG. 7B). The large winning opening 202 is open upward and has a horizontally long rectangular shape extending to the left and right in a plan view. The size (width dimension) of the large winning opening 202 is such that a plurality of game balls can pass through at the same time.

A through hole 222 that penetrates the base body 211 in the thickness direction is formed in the lower center of the passage portion 208. The through hole 222 has a substantially elliptical shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and has a size that allows a plurality of game balls to pass through at the same time. As shown in FIG. 6B, a ball passage 221 is provided on the back surface side of the base body 211, and the ball passage 221 communicates with the passage portion 208 through the through hole 222. The ball passage 221 extends rearward, and the game ball that has reached the ball passage 221 is guided backward along the bottom surface 221a of the passage. At an intermediate position, a winning sensor 202a for a large winning opening that detects a game ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening 202 is arranged. The winning sensor 202a for the large winning opening is electrically connected to the main control device 81, and when the game ball passes through the detection area of the winning sensor 202a for the large winning opening, predetermined detection information (detection signal) is mainly controlled. It is input to the device 81. The main control device 81 determines whether or not a prize has been won in the large winning opening 202 based on this detection information.

A plate-shaped shutter 216 as an opening / closing door 203 is arranged so as to cover the large winning opening 202. The shutter 216 is configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and has a protruding position protruding forward from the front portion 211a (front surface of the gaming board 24) of the base body 211 and retracting backward from the protruding position. , It is possible to displace to the evacuation position where the protrusion to the front of the gaming machine is suppressed.

When the shutter 216 is located at the retracted position, as shown in FIG. 7B, a receiving area RA capable of receiving the game ball into the large winning opening 202 is formed in the upper part of the passage portion 208. The receiving area RA has the same position and the same shape and size as the large winning opening 202 in a plan view, and the formation of the receiving area RA allows the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 202. To. In the retracted position, the front end portion of the shutter 216 is flush with the front surface portion 211a of the base body 211 or is located on the back surface side of the gaming machine with respect to the front surface portion 211a. As a result, not only the game ball can pass in front of the shutter 216 in the retracted position, but also the game ball is suppressed from being caught at the boundary between the base body 211 and the shutter 216, and a smooth flow of the game ball is ensured. Has been done.

On the other hand, when the shutter 216 is located at the protruding position, as shown in FIG. 7A, the large winning opening 202 is covered from above by the shutter 216, so that the receiving region RA disappears. As a result, the variable winning device 201 is closed, and the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 202 is restricted. It should be noted that it is not always necessary that the game ball cannot be won in the large winning opening 202 when it is in the closed state, and it may be possible to win in a range where it is difficult to win compared to the open state. In short, it suffices if the ease of winning the large winning opening 202 differs between the open state and the closed state, and the degree of closure or opening is arbitrary.

Here, as shown in FIG. 6A, the height positions of the left and right end portions 216a and 216b of the shutter 216 are at least the game ball 1 from the second inclined portions 136 and 166 of the flow path forming portions 131 and 161. It is set at a position that is lowered by the size of each piece. In other words, stepped portions 204 are formed on the left and right sides of the shutter 216 so that the left and right end portions 216a and 216b of the shutter 216 are lower than the second inclined portions 136 and 166 by the diameter of the game ball or more. .. The out ports 141 and 171 are arranged in these stepped portions 204 so as to open to the shutter 216 side. Therefore, when the game ball rolls on the shutter 216 located at the protruding position, the game ball is guided to the out openings 141 and 171 by the shutter 216.

The shutter 216 is provided with a guidance function for guiding the game ball to the out ports 141 and 171. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7A, a first shutter inclined portion 217 which is inclined downward toward the out port 141 is provided on the left side of the upper surface portion of the shutter 216, and is provided on the right side of the upper surface portion. Is provided with a second shutter inclined portion 218 that is inclined downward toward the out port 171. Each of these inclined portions 217 and 218 is symmetrical, and the game ball that has reached the upper surface portion of the shutter 216 is guided to the out ports 141 and 171 by the above-mentioned inclined portions 217 and 218. It is not always necessary to tilt the entire shutter 216, and it is sufficient if at least the upper surface thereof is tilted.

The shutter 216 extends in the left-right direction, and more specifically, the left and right end portions 216a and 216b are located in the vicinity of the second vertical wall portions 138 and 168 of the flow path forming portions 131 and 161. The distance between the left and right ends 216a and 216b of the shutter 216 and the out ports 141 and 171 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the game is played from between the shutter 216 located at the protruding position and the out ports 141 and 171. The ball does not fall. Therefore, all the game balls guided toward the out ports 141 and 171 by the shutter 216 enter the out ports 141 and 171 unless the shutter 216 is displaced to the retracted position during the guidance.

When the shutter 216 is located in the retracted position, in principle, the game balls enter the out ports 141 and 171 unless an event such as a change in the flow direction of the game balls occurs due to contact between the game balls. Do not ball.

As shown in FIGS. 6 (b) and 6 (c), a variable winning drive unit 219 for driving the shutter 216 is attached to the back surface side of the base body 211. The variable winning drive unit 219 has a solenoid as a drive source and a link mechanism as a drive force transmission means for transmitting the drive force from the solenoid to the shutter 216. The solenoid is electrically connected to the main control device 81 and is driven based on a drive signal from the main control device 81. By driving the solenoid, the shutter 216 retracts from the protruding position to the retracted position, and the variable winning device 201 switches from the closed state to the open state. When the output of the drive signal from the main control device 81 is stopped, the shutter 216 is advanced from the retracted position to the protruding position by the urging force of the urging means (spring or the like), and the variable winning device 201 is switched from the open state to the closed state.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 112 is mounted on the main control board 111. The MPU 112 is a ROM 113 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 112, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 113 is executed. A certain RAM 114, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built-in. It is not essential that the ROM 113 and the RAM 114 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 112, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 81.

The MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 115 and a payout control device 97 provided in the main control device 81 are connected to the input side of the MPU 112. In this case, a power supply having a function of supplying operating power and a launch control device 98 are connected to the power failure monitoring board 115, and power is supplied to the MPU 112 via the power failure monitoring board 115.

Further, various sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 112. The various sensors include a general winning opening 31, an upper working opening 33, a lower working opening 34, a through gate 35, a general winning opening winning sensor 31e for detecting a prize in the variable winning device 201, and an upper working opening winning sensor 33b. A winning sensor 34c for the lower operating port, a winning sensor 35a for the through, a winning sensor 202a for the large winning opening, and the like are provided. Based on the detection results of these various sensors 31e, 33b, 34c, 35a, 202a, the MPU 112 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry portion. Further, in the MPU 112, the jackpot generation lottery is executed based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34, and the support generating lottery is executed based on the winning of the through gate 35.

A power failure monitoring board 115, a payout control device 97, an effect control device 82, and the like are connected to the output side of the MPU 112. The payout control device 97 outputs, for example, a prize ball command based on a winning determination result to the prize ball corresponding entry unit corresponding to the payout of the prize ball.

Various commands for staging are output to the staging control device 82. Details of these various commands will be described later. Incidentally, the staging control device 82 is electrically connected to the main control device 81 via a connector unit (connecting unit) provided with connectors at both ends of the signal line.

Further, an electric accessory drive unit 34b and a variable winning drive unit 219 are connected to the output side of the MPU 112 as various drive units. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 111, and the MPU 112 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits. Specifically, when the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 219 is executed in the MPU 112 so that the large winning opening 202 is opened / closed. Further, when the electric accessory 34a is won in the open state, the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b is executed in the MPU 112 so that the electric accessory 34a is opened and closed. Further, in each game round, the display control of the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS in the main display unit 43 is executed in the MPU 112, and the main display unit is in the open / close execution mode of the variable winning device 201. The display control of the round display unit RS in 43 is executed. Then, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a is clearly shown, the display control of the accessory display unit 44 is executed in the MPU 112.

Furthermore, an external output terminal 99 is connected to the output side of the MPU 112, and through this external output terminal 99, the management control device (hall computer HC) on the game hall side is informed of the entry into various ball entry sections and a big hit. Information about the lottery result such as is output. This makes it possible to grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10 and the like with the hall computer HC.

The power failure monitoring board 115 relays between the main control board 111 and the power supply and launch control device 98, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

The power supply and the launch control device 98 are connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, the operating power required for each of the main control board 111, the payout control device 97, and the like is generated based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and the generated operating power is supplied. By the way, the power supply and the launch control device 98 are provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power failure is mainly used. Power for storage retention is supplied to the RAM 114 of the control device 81.

Further, the power supply and the launch control device 98 are responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 53, and the game ball launch mechanism 53 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are satisfied. In this case, the game ball launch mechanism 53 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 54 of the game board 24, a ball feeding device for supplying the game balls stored in the precision plate 71 onto the launch rail, and a launch rail. It is equipped with a solenoid, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail 54 toward the guide rail 54, and the game ball is supplied with a drive signal from the power supply and the launch control device 98 to the solenoid. Be fired.

The staging control device 82 is a display light emitting unit 63 and a speaker unit provided in each of the reserved light emitting units 45 to 47 provided in the variable display unit 36 and the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 81. The 64 is driven and controlled, and the display control device 212 is controlled.

The MPU 242 is mounted on the staging control board 241 provided on the staging control device 82. The MPU 242 is a ROM 243 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 242, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 243 is executed. A certain RAM 244, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built-in.

The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242. From the main control device 81, a hold display control command (hold display control information) such as a shift command or a hold command is received. It also receives game turn control commands (game turn control information) such as variable command, type command, and variable end command. It also receives open / close execution mode commands (open / close execution mode information) such as open command, close command, opening command, and ending command.

The MPU 242 performs processing for executing various effects based on various commands received from the main control device 81. The received command is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 244 of the MPU 242. Then, processing such as analysis of the stored command is performed, and various effects are executed. The ROM 243 of the MPU 242 is provided with various table storage areas, and the RAM 244 of the MPU 242 is provided with various flag storage areas and various counter areas. When performing various effects, processing using these areas is provided. It is possible to do.

On the output side of the MPU 242, the reserved light emitting units 45 to 47 provided in the variable display unit 36, the display light emitting unit 63 provided in the front door frame 14, and the speaker unit 64 are connected, and the display control device 212 is connected. Is connected.

The display control device 212 includes a display control board 271 on which an MPU 272 in which a program ROM 273 and a work RAM 274 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 275, a character ROM 276, and a video RAM 277, respectively, are mounted. There is.

From the effect control device 82, the MPU 272 includes a hold display control command (hold display control information) for controlling the hold display, a game turn control command (game turn control information) for performing variable display of a symbol, and a game turn control command. Receives open / close execution mode commands (open / close execution mode information) for displaying moving images in open / close execution mode. Then, the received commands are analyzed, or predetermined arithmetic processing is performed based on the received commands to control the VDP 275 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 275).

The program ROM 273 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 272 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 274 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 272. These work data, flags, etc. are stored in each area of the work RAM 274.

The VDP275 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP275 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 275 adjusts the timings of the MPU 272, the video RAM 277, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 277 from the character ROM 276 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 276 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 276 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 276 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 276. Further, it is also possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 273 in the character ROM 276.

The video RAM 277 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 277.

Here, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing individual symbols displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIGS. 9 (a) to 9 (j), a pattern which is a kind of a pattern consists of nine main patterns with numbers "1" to "9" and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of sub-designs. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as an octopus are assigned numbers "1" to "9" to form a main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 10A, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol column Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display screen G, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Further, as shown in FIG. 10B, on the display screen G, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is supposed to be done.

Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set on the display screen G. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state where a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on any of the effective lines. When the variable display of ~ Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the jackpot result.

In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when a probability variation jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbols are combined. Is stopped and displayed. In addition, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and when a normal jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. To.

The mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate.

The first reserved display area Ga is set on the left side at the lower part of the display screen G, and the second reserved display area Gb is set on the right side at the lower part of the display screen G.

In the first hold display area (non-priority side hold display area) Ga, the same number of unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 as the maximum number of holds when the game ball wins the upper operating port 33 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. It is displayed as a partition. Specifically, when the game ball wins the upper operating port 33, the maximum number of holdings is 4, and in correspondence with this, the first holding display area Ga includes the first unit holding display areas Ga1 and the second. The unit hold display area Ga2, the third unit hold display area Ga3, and the fourth unit hold display area Ga4 are set.

For example, when the number of holdings when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 33 is 1, a predetermined holding image is displayed only in the first unit holding display area Ga1, and the game ball is placed in the upper operating port 33. When the number of reserved images is four, a predetermined reserved image is displayed in all of the first unit reserved display area Ga1 to the fourth unit reserved display area Ga4.

Further, in the second hold display area (priority side hold display area) Gb, the same number of unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4 as the maximum number of holds when the game ball wins the lower operating port 34 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. It is displayed in a section so that it can be displayed. Specifically, when the game ball wins the lower operating port 34, the maximum number of holdings is 4, and in correspondence with this, the second holding display area Gb includes the first unit holding display area Gb1 and the second. The unit hold display area Gb2, the third unit hold display area Gb3, and the fourth unit hold display area Gb4 are set.

For example, when the number of holdings when the game ball wins in the lower operating port 34 is 1, the holding image is displayed only in the first unit holding display area Gb1, and the game ball wins in the lower operating opening 34. When the number of reserved images is 4, the reserved image is displayed in all of the 1st unit reserved display area Gb1 to the 4th unit reserved display area Gb4.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery with MPU 112 of the main control device 81>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery with the MPU 112 of the main control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

The MPU 112 uses various counter information during the game to perform a big hit generation lottery, setting the display of the main display unit 43, setting the effect content of the symbol display device 41, setting the display of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11, when the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery for generating jackpots, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 are displaced and fluctuate. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the variable type counter for determining the variable display time in the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41. CS and are to be used. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 is set to the electric accessory open state is used.

Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 114. In the lottery counter buffer 114a, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS is obtained when a prize is generated in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b as the acquisition information storage means.

The holding ball storage area 114b includes a holding area RE including a holding area Ra for the first result display unit and a holding area Rb for the second result display unit, and an execution area AE. The holding areas Ra and Rb are provided with a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, respectively, and are buffers for a lottery counter according to the winning history of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, respectively. The numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS stored in 114a is stored in any of the areas as pending information. The reserved information corresponds to special information.

In this case, in the first area to the fourth area, when the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second area → the third area → the fourth. Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of areas. By providing each of the four areas in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 can be reserved and stored. Further, a total reserved number storage area is provided in the reserved ball storage area 114b, and the number of winning histories stored in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is specified in the total reserved number storage area. Information for doing so is stored.

The number that can be stored on hold is not limited to four, and may be any other, such as two, three, or five or more, or may be a single number.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the hold area RE when starting the variable display of the main display unit 43, and is the execution area AE at the start of one game round. Based on various numerical information stored in, the hit / fail judgment is performed.

More specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 599, reach the maximum value (that is, 599), and then return to 0. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the lower operating port 34. It is stored in the reserved area Rb.

The value of the random number that wins the big hit is stored as a hit / miss table (hit / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area 113a as the hit / miss information group storage means in the ROM 113. As the pass / fail table, a pass / fail table for the low-probability mode (low-probability pass / fail information group) and a pass / fail table for the high-probability mode (high-probability pass / fail information group) are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means. In each winning / failing table, a random number value is set so that the winning / failing table for the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big hit than the winning / failing table for the low probability mode.

Further, in each lottery mode, the lottery result is out of order except for the value of the random number that is the big hit.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, reach the maximum value (that is, 29), and then return to 0. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are subject to two conditions: (1) a lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (2) a support mode in the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is set by making a difference.

As the support mode in the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34, the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 is compared in a situation where the launch of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the gaming area PE. Low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state) so that the frequency of opening is relatively high or low per unit time. ) And are set.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery using the electric accessory release counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 1/2). However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electric role open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and one more release. The time is set long. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric accessory open state is won and the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times, the electric accessory 34a is closed from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The time is set shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory opening lottery to be held after one electric accessory opening lottery is set is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. Has been done.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the lower operating port 34 will be won is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the upper operating port 33 is higher than that of the lower operating port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower operating port 34 is more likely than the upper operating port 33. The probability of winning a prize increases. Then, when a prize is won in the lower operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls held so much. be able to.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the electric service open state per unit time is not limited to the above, for example, the electric accessory open lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric service open state in. Further, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode may be set by differentiating any one of the conditions of the number of times, the opening time, and the winning probability, or any combination of the conditions.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the lower operating port 34. It is stored in the reserved area Rb.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 113b as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 113.

In the present embodiment, a normal jackpot result and a probabilistic jackpot result are set as the types of jackpot results. The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

The probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the winning / losing lottery becomes a big hit state and the state shifts to the big hit state.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, reach the maximum value (that is, 238), and then return to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the lower operating port 34. It is stored in the reserved area Rb. Then, it is decided whether or not to generate the reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 113. However, in the game round to shift to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 112 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state, but may be set individually according to the game state. For example, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display may be set to be larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

Here, the reach display (reach state) is provided with a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (picture), and in a gaming time in which the variable winning device 201 is in the open / close execution mode. In a gaming machine whose stop display result after variable display is a special display result, after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 41 is started, before the stop display result is derived and displayed. , A display state for making the player think that the special display result is a variable display state.

In other words, by stopping and displaying some of the symbols among the plurality of symbols displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is established. It is a display state in which a combination of reach symbols that may be possible is displayed, and in that state, a variable display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a pre-stage for ending the variable display of the symbol, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is established on the preset effective line in the display screen of the symbol display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of possible reach symbols, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of the symbols is performed by the final stop symbol row.

To specifically explain the display contents of FIG. 10, first, high-speed fluctuation display is started for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or impossible to recognize which symbol is displayed. After that, the variation display mode of the upper symbol sequence Z1 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display in which the player can easily or can recognize the symbol displayed. Then, when the variation display of the upper symbol sequence Z1 is completed, the variation display mode of the lower symbol sequence Z3 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display. After that, the variable display of the lower symbol column Z3 ends. In this case, the reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the same numbers on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. Then, when the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2 is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display and the open / close execution mode is generated, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is attached. Is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the variation display of the symbol in the symbol row Z2 in the middle row is terminated.

Further, in the reach display, in the state where the combination of the reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variable display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to reach the reach. It includes those that perform an effect and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen after reducing or hiding the combination of reach symbols. Further, when the reach display is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to perform the advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter. You may.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 112 to determine the variation display time in the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS of the main display unit 43 and the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. Be done. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the variable type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the lower operating port 34. It is stored in the reserved area Rb.

The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, reach the maximum value (that is, 250), and then return to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric accessory holding area 114c of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state by the value of the stored electric accessory opening counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 190, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the open state, and if C4 = 191 to 250, the electric accessory 34a is not controlled to the open state.

In the MPU 112, the fluctuation display time in the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS is determined by using the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE. The variable display time table storage area 113c is used. Further, in the MPU 112, the stop result in the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS is determined by using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, in making the determination, the stop result table storage area of the ROM 113 is used.

<About various processes executed by the main controller 81>
Next, timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed for advancing the game by the MPU 112 in the main control device 81 will be described. In the MPU 112, in addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the main process activated when the power is turned on and the NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) are executed. The description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is periodically activated by the MPU 112 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. In the reading process, the states of the various detection sensors 31e, 33b, 34c, 35a, 202a are read, the states of the various detection sensors 31e, 33b, 34c, 35a, 202a are determined, and the detection information is saved. .. Further, when the winning of the game ball is detected by the various detection sensors 31e, 33b, 34c, 202a corresponding to the generation of the prize ball, the prize for instructing the payout control device 97 to pay out the prize ball. Set the ball command. For example, when the winning sensor 202a for the large winning opening detects the winning of the variable winning device 201, a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls, which is the corresponding number of prize balls, is set. In the following step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated.

In the following step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 114.

In the following step S104, a winning process for passing through is executed in association with winning the winning through the through gate 35. In the winning process for through, when a winning is generated in the through gate 35, the number of winning combinations stored in the electric service holding area 114c is less than the upper limit number (for example, “4”). On condition that this is the condition, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric accessory holding area 114c. In addition, the effect control device 82 is subjected to a process for lighting the third hold light emitting unit 47 corresponding to the number of hold storages for the accessory.

Then, after the winning process for the operating port is executed in step S105, the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the winning process for the operating port, based on the winning of the game ball in any of the operating ports 33 and 34, a prize ball command for paying out the game ball based on the winning is set, and a jackpot random number counter is set. Information acquisition processing is performed to store the values of C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS.

In the information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the upper operating port 33. When the upper operating port 33 has won a prize, the number of hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is grasped, and the grasped number is set as the first start hold storage number RaN. .. On the other hand, when the game ball has not won the upper operating opening 33, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the lower operating opening 34 (starting winning). When the lower operating port 34 has won a prize, the number of hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is grasped, and the grasped number is set as the second start hold storage number RbN. .. Then, it is determined whether or not the set start hold storage number N (RaN or RbN) is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If the start hold storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the start hold storage number N in the corresponding result display hold area is updated to be incremented by 1. When the first start hold storage number RaN is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS are set to the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. When it is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area and the second start hold storage number RbN is set, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS Each value is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the holding area Rb for the second result display unit. After that, the staging control device 82 is subjected to a process for lighting the first reserved light emitting unit 45 or the second reserved light emitting unit 46 corresponding to the number of start pending storages.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in the normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S201 to S206 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S209 and S210 are executed in the remaining time.

In the normal processing, first, the external signal output processing is executed in step S201. In the external signal output processing in step S201, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt processing or the previous normal processing is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. If an effect command is set, it is transmitted to the effect control device 82.

Next, in step S202, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 114.

In the following step S203, a game time control process for advancing the game of each game time is executed. In this game round control process, a hit / fail judgment such as a big hit and a distribution judgment of a big hit type are performed, and a variation display of a symbol is set by the symbol display device 41, a variation display is set in the main display unit 43, and the like.

After executing the game times control process in step S203, the process proceeds to step S204 to execute the game state transition process. By this game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode or the like. The details of the game times control process in step S203 and the game state transition process in step S204 will be described later.

In the following step S205, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower actuating port 34 is executed. In this electric service support process, the electric service is released depending on whether or not the electric service 34a is opened by using the numerical information acquired from the electric service release counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 114c of the RAM 114. A lottery is performed, and when the electric accessory is won in the open state, the electric accessory 34a is opened and closed. In addition, the display control of the accessory display unit 44 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric service opening lottery.

After that, in step S206, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 53 is excited once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply and the launch control device 98. .. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

In the following step S207, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set in the RAM 114. The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed on the power failure monitoring board 115 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 115 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 112, and is erased in the next main process.

If the power failure flag is not set, it means that the last process of the plurality of processes to be repeatedly executed has been completed. Therefore, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached in step S208, that is, the normal process of this time. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached.

That is, in step S209, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 114. Further, in step S210, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is added by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, the counter values are cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 114.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and similarly. The variation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S207 that the power failure flag is set, it means that the power is cut off, so the power failure processing after step S211 is executed. That is, in step S211, the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, then the RAM determination value is calculated and saved in step S212, access to the RAM 114 is prohibited in step S213, and then the power supply is completely shut off for processing. Continues an infinite loop until it can no longer be executed.

<Game times control process>
Next, the game times control process in step S203 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the game times control process, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag is stored (stored) in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The open / close execution mode flag is stored when the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is deleted when the open / close execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process.

When the open / close execution mode is in progress, the main game is performed without executing any of the processes after step S302, that is, the game round start process of steps S303 to S305 and the game round progress process of steps S306 to S309. Ends the control process. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the game round is not started regardless of whether or not the operating openings 33 and 34 have been won.

If it is not in the open / close execution mode, it is determined in step S302 whether or not the main display unit 43 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS is in the variable display. It should be noted that this determination is performed by determining whether or not the variable display flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The variation display flag is stored when the variation display is started for either the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS, and is cleared when the variation display ends.

If the main display unit 43 is not in the variable display, the process proceeds to the game round start process of steps S303 to S305. In the game round start process, first, in step S303, it is determined whether or not the common hold number CRN, which is the total number of start hold storage numbers of the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS, is “0”. When the common hold number CRN is "0", it means that the start hold storage numbers RaN and RbN are "0" for both the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34. Therefore, the game times control process is terminated as it is.

If the common hold number CRN is not "0", the data stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is set for variable display in step S304. After executing the data setting process of the above, and further executing the variation start process for starting the variation display in the main display unit 43 and the variation display in the symbol display device 41 in step S305, the game round control process is terminated. In the fluctuation start process, the win / fail lottery is executed based on the data (holding information) set in the data setting process, and the stop result is such that the game round ends with the stop result corresponding to the result of the win / fail lottery. Make settings. In addition, the fluctuation display time of the game times to be executed this time is set based on the fluctuation type counter CS and the like. Further, in the variation start process, a variation command including information on the game result and a type command including information on the variation display time are sent to the effect control device 82 so that the effect corresponding to the game times to be executed this time is performed. Output settings. The variation command and the type command are transmitted to the staging control device 82 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 13). The effect control device 82 transmits the received command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 212 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 or the like so as to start the effect of the game times.

When the main display unit 43 is in the variable display, the game round progress process of steps S306 to S309 is executed. In the game round progress process, first, in step S306, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game round has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation display time information stored in the fluctuation display time counter area of the RAM 114 is "0". The value of the fluctuation display time information is set in the fluctuation start processing at the start of the game round. Further, the value of the set variable display time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is activated.

If the variation display time has not elapsed, the variation display process is executed in step S307. In the variable display processing, the result display unit is displayed and controlled (light emission control of each display segment) so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order in the result display unit related to the current game round. , The game round control process is terminated.

If the variation display time has elapsed, the variation end processing is executed in step S308. In the variation end processing, the information set based on the result of the winning / failing lottery of the variation start processing is specified, and the main display unit 43 is controlled so that the pattern corresponding to the information is stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43. do.

In the following step S309, a variable end command is set. After that, the game round control process is terminated. The variation end command set in step S309 is transmitted to the staging control device 82 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 13). The staging control device 82 transmits the received variable end command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form. By receiving the variable end command, the display control device 212 makes a definite display (final stop display) of the combination of the final stop symbols in the game round.

<Game state transition process>
Next, the game state transition process of step S204 in the normal process (FIG. 13) will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 15 to 16.

First, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S402, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the variation display of the pattern on the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS of one game round is completed. If it is not the timing when the variation display is finished, the game state transition process is finished as it is.

When the variation display is finished, in step S403, it is determined whether or not the game result of the current game times corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode. If it does not correspond to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

If it corresponds to the transition of the open / close execution mode, the start processing of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S404. In the start process, it is checked that the variable winning device 201 is in the closed state before the start of the open / close execution mode. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode start processing, the opening period setting processing for waiting without starting the opening of the variable winning device 201 at the start of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. In the opening period setting process, the waiting time information for opening stored in advance in the ROM 113 is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. The value of the timer counter T is decremented by 1 in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec cycle, each time the timer interrupt process is activated).

In the following step S405, the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode to be executed this time on the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43 (“15” in any jackpot result in this embodiment) is displayed as the start processing of the round display. To control.

In the following step S406, an opening command is set. This set opening command is transmitted to the staging control device 82 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 13). The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. The content of this effect includes a display mode in the symbol display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display (for example, moving image display) corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode is performed based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82.

Then, in step S407, after executing the external signal setting process, the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided in the external output terminal 99 is set to the jackpot signal output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 generates a jackpot in the management control device. You can understand what you have done.

On the other hand, if the open / close execution mode is in progress, an affirmative determination is made in step S401, and the process proceeds to step S408. In step S408, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the large winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S409. Here, the large winning opening opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the variable winning device 201 is in the open state and the large winning opening 202 is open. Specifically, such a determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning driving unit 219. When the large winning opening 202 is not opened, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0", and whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0" in step S503. To judge.

If the value of the round counter RC is "0" or the value of the timer counter T is not "0", the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter RC is not "0" and the value of the timer counter T is "0", the process proceeds to step S504, and the variable winning drive unit 219 is set to open the variable winning device 201. It is in the driving state.

In the following step S505, the round opening time setting process is executed. In the opening time setting process, "15000" (30 sec) corresponding to the upper limit opening time (upper limit opening period) of the round is input to the timer counter T.

In the following step S506, the processing for setting the maximum number of winnings in each round is performed. In the process of setting the maximum number of winnings in each round, a process of inputting "10" corresponding to the maximum number of winnings is performed in the winning counter PC provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114.

Then, in step S507, the release command is set, and the main opening / closing process is completed. This set release command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 13). The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to each round based on the received release command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

If the variable winning device 201 is in the open state in step S501, the process proceeds to step S508, and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0". When the value of the timer counter T is not "0", it is determined in step S509 whether or not the game ball has won the variable winning device 201 based on the detection state of the winning sensor 202a for the large winning opening. If no prize has been awarded, the main opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when a prize has been generated, the value of the prize counter PC is decremented by 1 in step S510, and then it is determined in step S511 whether or not the value of the prize counter PC is "0", and "0". If not, the main opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

When the value of the timer counter T is "0" in step S508 and the upper limit opening time has elapsed, or when the value of the winning counter PC is "0" in step S511 and the upper limit winning number is won. , Means that the end condition of the round has been met. In such a case, the variable winning drive unit 219 is put into a non-driving state in order to close the variable winning device 201 in step S512.

In the following step S513, the value of the round counter RC is decremented by 1 and the round counter RC is updated. Following step S514, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0".

If the value of the round counter RC is not "0", the closing time between the rounds, that is, from the open state to the closed state of the variable winning device 201 until the open state is set again in step S515 is set. Execute the process. In the closing time setting process, a process of inputting "2000" (4 sec) corresponding to the waiting time (interval) between rounds is performed in the timer counter T.

After that, the closing command is set in step S516, and the main opening / closing process is completed. The closing command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 13). The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the interval of the round game based on the received closing command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

If it is determined in step S514 that the value of the round counter RC is "0", the ending start process is executed in step S517. In the start process, an ending waiting time for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the open / close execution mode is set. Specifically, the timer counter T is set with the waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 113. In the present embodiment, the waiting time for ending is set to be 5 sec, and in step S517, a process of inputting "2500" to the timer counter T is performed.

Then, in step S518, after setting the ending command, the main opening / closing process is terminated. The ending command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 13). The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the end of the open / close execution mode based on the received ending command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 15), after executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S409, it is determined in step S410 whether or not the round counter RC is “0”. If the value of the round counter RC is not "0", the game state transition process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter RC is "0", the timer counter T determines whether or not the waiting time for the ending has ended in step S411. If the waiting time for the ending has not ended, the game state transition process ends as it is. On the other hand, when the waiting time for the ending has ended, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S412.

In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode after the open / close execution mode are set. Specifically, if the trigger of the opening / closing execution mode this time is a probability change jackpot result, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, and the normal jackpot result is obtained. If so, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode with a limited number of times.

Then, in step S413, the process for ending the display of the round display unit RS is executed, and in step S414, the end process of the open / close execution mode is executed, and then the game state transition process is ended. In the end processing of the open / close execution mode, the transition to the open / close execution mode and the deletion of various counters and flags used in the open / close execution mode are performed.

<About the flow of the game>
Next, the flow of each game in the normal game state (game state other than the open / close execution mode) and the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game in the normal game state, and FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game in the open / close execution mode.

First, the flow of the game in the normal game state will be described with reference to FIG. When the game ball flowing down the left side region PE2 (see FIG. 4) reaches the left side flow path forming portion 131, the game ball descends along the first inclined portion 133 of the left side flow path forming portion 131, and the left side game nail group. Derived towards 134. When the game ball jumps over the gap 135 between the first inclined portion 133 and the left side game nail group 134, the game ball is guided toward the lower operating port 34 by the left side game nail group 134. When the game ball crosses the left side game nail group 134, if the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball wins in the lower operating port 34, and if the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. , The game ball falls toward the variable winning device 201 without winning the lower operating port 34.

On the other hand, if the game ball falls from the gap 135 between the first inclined portion 133 and the left side game nail group 134 or the gap 135 provided in the middle of the left side game nail group 134, the game ball is a general prize. It is guided above the openings 31a and 31b or the general winning openings 31a and 31b. When the game balls win the general winning openings 31a and 31b, the winning is detected by the general winning opening winning sensor 31e, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the gaming balls are paid out. On the other hand, when the game ball dropped from the gap 135 does not win the general winning openings 31a and 31b, the game ball is on the left side formed between the first vertical wall portion 137 and the general winning opening 31a. By passing through the third flow path or passing between the general winning opening 31a and the general winning opening 31b, it falls on the second inclined portion 136 of the left flow path forming portion 131.

As described above, the second inclined portion 136 has a loophole for a game ball such as an out opening between the connection portion with the first vertical wall portion 137 and the terminal portion (the end portion on the variable winning device 201 side). All the game balls that have fallen on the second inclined portion 136 are led out to the variable winning device 201 side. Then, the game ball led out to the variable winning device 201 side falls on the upper surface of the shutter 216 in a state where the large winning opening 202 is closed at the protruding position, and each inclined portion 217 provided on the shutter 216 is provided. , 218 guides you to the out ports 141 and 171. Here, since the distance between the left and right end portions 216a and 216b of the shutter 216 and the second vertical wall portions 138 and 168 of the left flow path forming portion 131 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the shutter 216 rolls on the shutter 216. The game ball does not fall from between the shutter 216 and the second vertical wall portions 138 and 168, and both enter the out openings 141 and 171.

Further, in the area PE4b between the left side game nail group 134 and the variable winning device 201, the game nails 38 are arranged so as to guide the game ball flowing into the area PE4b to the variable winning device 201. Therefore, even if the game ball that has passed through the gap 135 does not reach the second inclined portion 136, the game ball is led out to the variable winning device 201 and falls on the shutter 216. Then, as in the above case, it rolls on the shutter 216 and is guided to the out ports 141 and 171.

When the game ball is launched so as to flow down the right side area PE3 (see FIG. 4) and the game ball that has flowed down the right side area PE3 reaches the right side flow path forming portion 161, the game ball reaches the right side flow path forming portion 161. It is derived toward the right side game nail group 164 by the first inclined portion 163 of 161. Also in this case, if the game ball does not reach the right side game nail group 164 or falls from the gap 165 provided in the middle of the right side game nail group 164, the game ball is the general winning opening 31c, 31d or It is guided above the general winning openings 31c and 31d.

Then, the game ball that did not win in the general winning openings 31c and 31d passes through the third channel on the right side formed between the first vertical wall portion 167 and the general winning opening 31d, or becomes a general winning opening 31c. By passing through between the general winning opening 31d and the like, it falls on the second inclined portion 166 of the right side flow path forming portion 161. Even in the second inclined portion 166, since there is no loophole for the game ball such as an out opening between the connection portion with the first vertical wall portion 167 and the terminal portion (the end portion on the variable winning device 201 side), the second All the game balls that have fallen on the inclined portion 166 are led out to the variable winning device 201 side and fall on the upper surface of the shutter 216.

Further, even when the game ball flows into the area PE4c between the right side game nail group 164 and the variable winning device 201, it is led out to the variable winning device 201 side by the game nails 38 arranged in the area PE4c, and the upper surface of the shutter 216. Fall up. Further, the game ball that has reached the vicinity of the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 but has not won any of these operating ports 33 and 34 and has flowed into the region PE4a is also derived to the variable winning device 201 side. It falls on the upper surface of the shutter 216.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game in which the upper operating port 33, the lower operating port 34, and the general winning openings 31a to 31d are not won regardless of whether the game ball passes through the left side region PE2 or the right side region PE3. All of the spheres are aggregated in the arrangement area of the variable winning device 201. When the shutter 216 is in the protruding position and the variable winning device 201 is in the closed state, the aggregated game balls are guided to the out ports 141 and 171 by the shutter 216 after falling on the shutter 216.

Next, the flow of the game in the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. The flow until the game balls flowing down the left side region PE2 and the right side region PE3 are aggregated in the arrangement area of the variable winning device 201 is the same as in the normal gaming state, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the variable winning device 201 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and then the switching control (open / close control) from the open state to the closed state is performed at least once (this implementation). In the form of, it is performed 15 times). In the open state of the variable winning device 201, the shutter 216 is positioned at the retracted position to form a receiving area RA (see FIG. 7B) capable of receiving the game ball into the large winning opening 202, and the large winning opening 202 is formed. The prize for the game ball is allowed. On the other hand, in the closed state, the shutter 216 is located at the protruding position, so that the receiving area RA disappears, and the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 202 is restricted.

Under such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the second inclined portions 136 and 166 of the flow path forming portions 131 and 161 and the game balls flowing down into the regions PE4a to PE4c are formed in the region where the receiving region RA is formed. It is configured to be aggregated in. Therefore, when the shutter 216 is in the retracted position (the variable winning device 201 is in the open state) and the game balls reach the formation area of the receiving area RA, all the game balls are placed in the receiving area RA. It flows in and wins a prize in the large winning opening 202 (flows into the passage portion 208). As a result, the generation of out balls is suppressed, and the game balls can be efficiently won by the variable winning device 201.

On the other hand, when the shutter 216 is in the protruding position (the variable winning device 201 is in the closed state) and the gaming ball reaches the formation region of the receiving region RA, the gaming ball is as in the normal gaming state. It falls on the shutter 216 and is guided to the out ports 141 and 171.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Among the game balls flowing down the game area PE, the game balls that did not win in the other winning portions (upper operating port 33, lower operating port 34, general winning openings 31a to 31d) on the upstream side of the variable winning device 201. All of the above are derived to a predetermined area (the area where the receiving area RA is formed). In this case, by watching the flow of the game balls gathering in the predetermined area, when the variable winning device 201 is switched to the open state, the variable winning device 201 is likely to efficiently win the game ball. It will be possible to give.

Moreover, the left side flow path forming portion 131 and the right side flow path forming part 161 are provided, and even if the game ball flows down in any of the left side region PE2 and the right side region PE3, the above-mentioned derivation to a predetermined region is performed. Therefore, the flow of the game balls gathering in the predetermined area can be generated on a daily basis, not limited to a special game state such as when hitting right. That is, when the player constantly watches the above flow, it is possible to promote awareness that the variable winning device 201 is likely to win a prize efficiently, and to enhance the enjoyment of generating the open / close execution mode.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable winning device 201 is in the closed state, the game ball led out to the predetermined area is configured to be guided to the out openings 141 and 171. In this case, the game balls aggregated in the predetermined area in the normal game state can be appropriately released to the outside of the game area PE. As a result, the game ball is suppressed from staying in the predetermined area, and the ball clogging in the predetermined area and the peripheral area thereof is suppressed. For example, if ball jams occur frequently in these areas, the chances of having the game hall staff clear the ball jams increase, which is inconvenient for the player to feel annoyed or to construct a flow of game balls contrary to the design intention. However, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience.

The left side flow path forming portion 131 and the right side flow path forming portion 161 are provided on the left and right sides of the game board 24, and the variable winning device 201 is arranged between these flow path forming portions 131 and 161. In this case, a predetermined region for collecting the game balls can be set between the flow path forming portions 131 and 161, and the game balls can be brought closer to the left and right center portions of the lower region PE4. As a result, for example, as compared with the case where the predetermined area is set in the left corner or the right corner of the game board 24, it is possible to construct the flow of the game balls gathering in the predetermined area in a place that is easily noticed by the player. Become. Further, since the variable winning device 201 is located between the flow path forming portions 131 and 161, the variable winning device 201 can be connected to the variable winning device 201 without the player actually seeing the flow of the game ball due to the positional relationship between the three parties. Can give the impression that it is easy to gather, and it becomes possible to appropriately arouse the motivation to play.

First inclined portions 133 and 163 are provided in the flow path forming portions 131 and 161 to derive the game balls above the general winning openings 31a to 31d, and then the game balls that have not won the general winning openings 31a to 31d. It is configured to lead to the variable winning device 201. For example, if the variable winning device 201 is configured so that the gaming ball wins the prize too efficiently, the processing load inside the gaming machine for winning the prize increases, which may hinder the operation of the gaming machine. In this respect, in this configuration, the number of game balls reaching the variable winning device 201 is reduced and variable by constructing the flow of the game balls so as to move to the general winning openings 31a to 31d and then to the variable winning device 201. It is possible to prevent the number of winnings in the winning device 201 from becoming excessive. At that time, since the general winning openings 31a to 31d are used, the frequency of winning the variable winning device 201 can be reduced while paying out the game balls. For this reason, as compared with the case where the frequency of winning the variable winning device 201 is reduced by, for example, guiding the game ball to the out opening, it becomes easier for the player to understand and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation for playing. ..

Out ports 141 and 171 are arranged on the side of the shutter 216. In this case, the game ball can be guided to the out ports 141 and 171 by utilizing the flow of the game ball on the shutter 216 in the protruding position, and the shutter 216 can be used as a guide passage to the out ports 141 and 171. Become. Moreover, since the distance between the shutter 216 and the out ports 141 and 171 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, it is possible to prevent the game ball from falling downward from between the shutter 216 and the out ports 141 and 171. As a result, a separate guide path for guiding the game ball from the shutter 216 to the out ports 141 and 171 becomes unnecessary, and the game ball guide path to the out ports 141 and 171 can be simplified.

<Modification 1 of the first embodiment>
In this modification, the configurations of the second inclined portions 136 and 166 and the variable winning device 201 in the flow path forming portions 131 and 161 are different from those of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configurations of the second inclined portion 136, 166 and the variable winning device 201 according to the present modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. In these figures, the same components as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 19, in this modification, the second inclined portions 136 and 166 are provided with out ports 231 and 232. Each of the out ports 231 and 232 is opened upward so that one game ball can pass through.

The out openings 231 and 232 are provided in the middle of the rolling surface of the game ball in the second inclined portion 136 and 166, and specifically, the most upstream portion of the second inclined portion 136 and 166, that is, the first 1 It is provided at the end of the vertical wall portion on the 137, 167 side. Therefore, the game balls that have passed through the third flow paths formed between the first vertical wall portions 137 and 167 and the general winning openings 31a and 31d can enter the out openings 141 and 171. Become. By the way, since the ratio of the game balls flowing into the third flow path among the game balls flowing down the game area PE is small, in this modified example, the operating openings 33 and 34 and the general winning openings 31a to 31d are not won. Almost all (almost) of the game balls are derived to the arrangement area of the variable winning device 201.

As described above, by providing the out ports 231 and 232 at the intermediate positions of the second inclined portions 136 and 166, the game balls can be discharged from the game area PE in the process of leading the game balls toward the variable winning device 201. It becomes a thing. Therefore, as compared with the first embodiment in which the game ball is uniformly derived toward the variable winning device 201, it becomes difficult to predict the whereabouts of the game ball, and it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the flow of the game ball. It will be possible.

In the above modification, the out ports 231 and 232 are provided at the most upstream portion of the second inclined portions 136 and 166, but the arrangement location of the out ports 231 and 232 is not limited to this, and for example, It is also possible to provide it at an intermediate position between the most upstream portion and the most downstream portion of the second inclined portion 136,166. By the way, the closer the out openings 231 and 232 are to the most downstream portion of the second inclined portions 136 and 166, the higher the entry rate of the game ball into the out openings 231 and 232 can be increased. That is, the out ports 231 and 232 can be used as an adjusting means for adjusting the arrival rate of the game ball to the variable winning device 201.

Further, in the above modification, out ports are provided in each of the second inclined portion 136 of the left side flow path forming portion 131 and the second inclined portion 166 of the right side flow path forming portion 161. , 166 may be configured to have an out port on only one of them. Furthermore, an out port that opens upward is provided in the first inclined portion 133, 163 of each flow path forming portion 131, 161 or any of the flow path forming portions, or the first vertical wall portion 137, 167 is laterally (s). An out port may be provided to open on the left and right center sides of the lower region PE4).

Next, the variable winning device 201 according to this modification will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, the variable winning device 201 according to this modification is characterized by the configuration of the shutter 216.

In this modification, the variable winning device 201 is provided with a deceleration means for reducing the moving speed of the game ball when it moves on the shutter 216. Specifically, the upper surface portion 216c of the shutter 216 is provided with a plurality of convex strip portions 215 extending in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the game ball. Each ridge portion 215 projects upward from the upper surface portion 216c of the shutter 216 and forms a columnar shape having a semicircular cross section that is convex upward. These ridges 215 are arranged so as to be arranged in the moving direction of the game ball on the shutter 216 (the left-right direction of the game machine), and are arranged at predetermined intervals.

By providing such a deceleration means, when the game ball is placed on the upper surface portion 216c of the shutter 216, the game ball moving toward the out ports 141 and 171 is decelerated, and the game ball stays on the shutter 216. The period will be extended. As a result, when the game ball reaches the shutter 216 during the waiting period between the round games (the period in which the variable winning device 201 is closed), before the game ball crosses the shutter 216. The probability that the next round game will be started (the variable winning device 201 will be switched to the open state) will increase. That is, not only the game ball that reached the variable winning device 201 at the timing when the variable winning device 201 is in the open state, but also the game ball that reached the variable winning device 201 during the standby period wins a prize in the large winning opening 202. Will be possible, and more efficient winning can be expected. Since the ridge portion 215 functions to obstruct the flow of the game ball on the shutter 216, it can also be referred to as an obstruction portion or an obstacle portion.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the variable winning device and its peripheral configuration are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the variable winning device 301 and its peripheral configuration according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. 21 (a) is a front view of the variable winning device 301 and its peripheral configuration, (b) and (c) are cross-sectional views of the variable winning device 301, and FIG. 22 (a) is the variable winning device 301 and its peripheral configuration. , (B) is a plan view showing the rear surface portion 305c of the opening / closing door 305. In these figures, the same components as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the large winning opening 302 of the variable winning device 301 is formed as a horizontally long rectangular opening in front view that opens toward the front, as shown in FIG. 21 (a). The size (width dimension) of the large winning opening 302 is larger than that of two game balls when viewed from the front of the game machine, and is large enough to allow a plurality of game balls to pass through at the same time. As shown in FIG. 21 (c), a ball passage 303 is formed behind the large winning opening 302 to guide the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 302 to the back side of the game board 24 and then guide it downward. ing. At a position in the middle of the ball passage 303, a winning sensor 302a for a large winning opening that detects a game ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening 302 is arranged.

The variable winning device 201 is provided with a plate-shaped opening / closing door 305 corresponding to the large winning opening 302. The opening / closing door 305 can rotate in the front-rear direction about a rotation axis provided at the lower end of the large winning opening 302. By this forward / backward rotation, the protruding position (opening position) that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 24 to open the large winning opening 302, and the retracted position that suppresses the protrusion from the front surface of the game board 24 and covers the large winning opening 302 (the opening position). It can be displaced to the closed position).

As shown in FIG. 21B, when the opening / closing door 305 is located in the evacuation position, the opening / closing door 305 covers the large winning opening 302 from the front, so that the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 302 is restricted. Then, the large winning opening 302 is closed. At that time, the front portion 305b of the opening / closing door 305 is located flush with the front surface of the gaming board 24 (front portion 311a of the base body 311 of the variable winning device 301) or on the rear side of the gaming machine with respect to the front surface of the gaming board 24. It has become. When the opening / closing door 305 rotates forward and is displaced to the protruding position from this state, a receiving area RA capable of receiving the game ball is formed in front of the large winning opening 302. The receiving area RA has the same shape and size as the large winning opening 302 when viewed from the front, and the formation of the receiving area RA allows the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 302. As a result, the large winning opening 302 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 21A, the height position of the opening / closing door 305 is set so that the opening / closing door 305 and the out ports 141 and 171 formed in the flow path forming portions 131 and 161 are arranged side by side. There is. Specifically, when the opening / closing door 305 is located at the protruding position, at least one rear surface portion (ball receiving portion) 305c of the opening / closing door 305 is provided from the second inclined portions 136 and 166 of the flow path forming portions 131 and 161. It is set so that the position is lowered by the size of the minute. In other words, between the rear surface portion 305c of the opening / closing door 305 and the second inclined portion 136,166, the rear surface portion 305c of the opening / closing door 305 is lower than the second inclined portion 136,166 by the diameter of the game ball or more. A portion is formed, and the out ports 141 and 171 are arranged at the step portion. With such a configuration, when the opening / closing door 305 is located at the protruding position, a part of the game balls moving on the opening / closing door 305 enters the out openings 141 and 171.

The out openings 141 and 171 are open on the opening / closing door 305 side as in the first embodiment, and the size thereof is such that one game ball can pass through. Further, the front surfaces of the flow path forming portions 131 and 161 in the out ports 141 and 171 and their peripheral portions are opaque, and the visibility from the front of the gaming machine is lower than that of the lower out port 321 described later.

As shown in FIG. 22B, a protrusion 325 is provided on the rear surface portion 305c of the opening / closing door 305. The protrusion 325 projects upward from the rear surface portion 305c, and is for adjusting the accessibility of the game ball moving on the opening / closing door 305 to the out ports 141 and 171. That is, the higher the protrusion 325 or the larger the number of protrusions, the more difficult it is for the game ball to reach the out ports 141,171, and by adjusting them at the time of designing the game machine, the out openings 141,171 It is possible to adjust the ease of escape of the game ball to, that is, the winning rate of the game ball to the large winning opening 302.

In the present embodiment, since the protrusion 325 is arranged close to the front end 305f of the opening / closing door 305, even if the pachinko machine 10 is laid down in the game hall, the game balls to the out ports 141 and 171 can be placed. It is possible to adjust the reachability of. That is, by increasing the laying (forward inclination) of the pachinko machine 10, the game ball easily passes through the front end portion 305f side of the opening / closing door 305, and is easily affected by the protrusion 325. In the present embodiment, the protrusions 325 are arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening / closing door 305, but they may be arranged only on either the left or right side. Further, the number of protrusions 325 is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more.

As shown in FIG. 21A, the opening / closing door 305 extends in the left-right direction, and in detail, the left-right end portions 305d and 305e (see FIG. 22B) are the first of the flow path forming portions 131 and 161. 2 It is located in the vicinity of the vertical wall portions 138 and 168. The distance between the left and right ends 305d, 305e of the opening / closing door 305 and the out openings 141, 171 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and is between the opening / closing door 305 located at the protruding position and the out openings 141, 171. The game ball does not fall from the door.

As shown in FIG. 21B, a variable winning drive unit 219 for driving the opening / closing door 305 is attached to the back surface side of the base body 311. The variable winning drive unit 219 has a solenoid as a drive source and a link mechanism as a drive force transmission means for transmitting the drive force from the solenoid to the opening / closing door 305. The solenoid is electrically connected to the main control device 81 and is driven based on a drive signal from the main control device 81. By driving the solenoid, the opening / closing door 305 rotates from the retracted position to the protruding position, and the variable winning device 301 switches from the closed state to the open state. When the output of the drive signal from the main control device 81 is stopped, the opening / closing door 305 returns from the protruding position to the retracted position by the urging force of the urging means (spring, etc.), and the variable winning device 301 switches from the open state to the closed state. ..

As shown in FIG. 21A, a lower out port 321 is arranged below the variable winning device 301. The lower out port 321 opens toward the front and has a substantially elliptical shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front. The size (width dimension) of the lower out port 321 is larger than that of two game balls when viewed from the front of the game machine, and is large enough to allow a plurality of game balls to pass through at the same time. Behind the lower out port 321 is a ball passage 322 that guides the game ball that has entered the lower out port 321 to the back side of the game board 24. In the present embodiment, the ball passage 322 corresponding to the lower out port 321 and the ball passage 303 corresponding to the large winning opening 302 are merged, but these ball passages 322 and 303 do not merge. May be.

<About the flow of the game>
Next, the flow of each game in the normal game state and the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 23B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game in the open / close execution mode. In both the normal game state and the open / close execution mode, refer to FIG. 18 for the flow until the game balls flowing down the left side region PE2 and the right side region PE3 are concentrated in the arrangement area of the variable winning device 301. Since it is the same as the case of the first embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the flow of the game in the normal game state will be described with reference to FIG. 23 (a). In the normal game state, the open / close execution mode is not executed, and the variable winning device 301 continues to be closed. In such a state, when the game balls via the second inclined portions 136 and 166 of the flow path forming portions 131 and 161 and the regions PE4a to PE4c are led out to the variable winning device 301 side, those game balls will eventually be used. Also passes in front of the opening / closing door 305 and flows down toward the lower out port 321. That is, all the game balls collected in the arrangement area of the variable winning device 301 in the normal game state enter the lower out port 321 and are discharged from the game area PE.

Next, the flow of the game in the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. 23 (b). As described above, when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the variable winning device 301 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and then the switching control from the open state to the closed state is performed at least once (1 in the present embodiment). The round game to be performed is executed, and in the open / close execution mode, such a round game is performed a plurality of times (15 times in the present embodiment). In the open state of the variable winning device 301, the opening / closing door 305 is located at the protruding position, so that a receiving area RA (see FIG. 21 (c)) capable of receiving the game ball into the large winning opening 302 is formed, and the large winning opening is formed. The winning of the game ball to 302 is allowed. On the other hand, in the closed state, the opening / closing door 305 is located at the retracted position, so that the receiving area RA disappears, and the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 302 is restricted.

Then, in the game area PE, as in the case of the first embodiment, the game balls are configured to be concentrated in the area where the receiving area RA is formed. Therefore, when the opening / closing door 305 is in the protruding position and the variable winning device 301 is in the open state, when the game balls reach the forming area of the receiving area RA, all the game balls flow into the receiving area RA. do. The game ball that has flowed into the receiving area RA in this way falls on the rear surface portion 305c of the opening / closing door 305, and then advances rearward on the rear surface portion 305c to win a prize in the large winning opening 302. Further, some game balls move in the left-right direction on the rear surface portion 305c of the opening / closing door 305. Then, when the ball gets over the protrusion 325, the ball enters the out openings 141 and 171 and is discharged from the game area PE. As described above, when a game ball wins in the large winning opening 302, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of playing balls are paid out, but when the playing balls enter the out openings 141 and 171. No game balls will be paid out.

On the other hand, when the opening / closing door 305 reaches the forming region of the receiving region RA under the situation where the opening / closing door 305 is in the retracted position and the variable winning device 301 is in the closed state, the gaming ball opens / closes as in the normal gaming state. Passing in front of the door 305, the ball enters the lower out opening 321.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

All of the game balls that did not win in the other winning portions (upper operating opening 33, lower operating opening 34, general winning openings 31a to 31d) on the upstream side of the variable winning device 301 are formed in a predetermined area (accepting area RA). Since it is configured to be derived to the region), the same effect as that of the first embodiment can be obtained.

When the lower out port 321 and the out ports 141 and 171 are provided and the variable winning device 301 is in the closed state, the game ball enters the lower out port 321 and the variable winning device 301 is in the open state. The ball is configured to enter the out ports 141 and 171. This is expected to have the following effects.

If the game ball wins the variable winning device 301 too efficiently, it will be biased toward the player side and will be advantageous, which may hinder the operation in the game hall. If such inconvenience is expected at the design stage of the gaming machine, the flow path of the gaming ball may be reviewed and the winning rate to the variable winning device 301 may be adjusted. In this case, if the game ball is blatantly guided to the out opening side and the winning rate of the game ball to the variable winning device 301 is lowered, the motivation for playing may be lowered, which is not desirable.

In this respect, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned problems are dealt with by configuring the out port for discharging the game ball to be switched according to the operating state of the variable winning device 301. That is, when the variable winning device 301 is in the closed state, the game ball enters the lower out port 321. Therefore, in the game state in which the open / close execution mode is not executed, the game ball is ejected through the lower out port 321. In the game, the period in which the opening / closing execution mode is not performed is longer and more likely to be dominant than the period in which the opening / closing execution mode is performed. Therefore, the lower out port 321 is the discharge port for the game ball, and the awareness that the game ball entering the lower out port 321 becomes the out ball is promoted. On top of that, when the variable winning device 301 is in the open state, the game ball is discharged not through the lower out port 321 but through another out port 141, 171. Since there is a prejudice that the lower out port 321 is an out port, even if a game ball is inserted into the out ports 141 and 171 it is suppressed that the player recognizes this as the discharge of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to eject the game balls that did not win the variable winning device 301 in the open state while making the ejection inconspicuous. This makes it possible to adjust the winning rate of the game ball to the variable winning device 301 while suppressing the decrease in the motivation for playing.

Moreover, in the present embodiment, since the ball is entered into the out openings 141 and 171 via the opening / closing door 305 at the protruding position, the game is to concentrate the game balls in the arrangement area of the variable winning device 301. It is also possible to maintain the flow of the sphere. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the winning rate of the game ball to the variable winning device 301 while giving the impression that the game ball tends to approach the variable winning device 301.

The visibility of the out ports 141 and 171 from the front view (front view from the front of the gaming machine) is set to be lower than that of the lower out port 321. In this case, the presence of the out ports 141 and 171 is diluted as compared with the lower out ports 321 and it is suppressed that the player's attention to the out ports 141 and 171 is increased. As a result, the discharge of the game ball through the out ports 141 and 171 can be made less noticeable.

In addition, in order to dilute the presence of the out ports 141 and 171 while emphasizing the lower out port 321, a display (for example, "OUT") suggesting or clearly indicating that the out port is an out port is displayed, for example, on the lower side. The above display is displayed around the lower out port 321 such as the side of the out port 321 or provided on the decorative body when the decorative body is arranged in front of the lower out port 321. On the other hand, the out ports 141 and 171 may not be provided with such a display, or the above display may be made less noticeable than that of the lower out port 321 (for example, the display may be made smaller). , Thinning, etc.) may be configured.

The out ports 141 and 171 were arranged on the upstream side of the lower out port 321. In a gaming machine, the out opening is often arranged at the lowermost part (downstream portion) of the gaming area PE, and it is assumed that there are many cases where the player plays with such a prejudice. This configuration utilizes this, and by arranging the out ports 141 and 171 on the upstream side of the lower out port 321, the player can see the out ports 141 and 171 as the out ports at first glance. Can be suppressed.

Out ports 141 and 171 were arranged adjacent to the opening / closing door 305. When the opening / closing door 305 is in the protruding position and the game ball moving on the rear surface portion 305c of the opening / closing door 305 passes through the opening / closing door 305, the game ball is quickly entered into the out openings 141 and 171. Can be done. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the flow of the game ball from passing through the opening / closing door 305 to the out ports 141 and 171 and the entry of the game ball into the out ports 141 and 171 becomes more inconspicuous. .. Further, by adjoining the out openings 141 and 171 and the opening / closing door 305, the distance between the opening / closing door 305 and the large winning opening 302 can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to enter the ball into the out openings 141 and 171 while making it appear as if the game ball is winning in the large winning opening 302, and it becomes possible to make the discharge less noticeable.

The distance between the out openings 141 and 171 and the opening / closing door 305 was set to be less than the diameter of the game ball. For example, if the game ball falls from between the out openings 141 and 171 and the opening / closing door 305, the player visually recognizes the game ball spilling from the opening / closing door 305, and as a result, the game ball tends to spill. It may be easier to hold. In this respect, in this configuration, since the game ball is prevented from falling between the out openings 141 and 171 and the opening / closing door 305, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to give the impression that the game ball is likely to spill. It is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in motivation for playing.

In the above embodiment, the game ball cannot enter the lower out opening 321 when it is in the open state, but it is possible to enter the ball in a range where it is difficult to enter the ball when it is in the closed state. It may be configured. In addition, although the game ball is basically not inserted into the out openings 141 and 171 when it is in the closed state, it is also possible to enter the ball in a range where it is difficult to enter the ball as compared with the case where it is in the open state. good.

<Third embodiment>
In this embodiment, the variable winning device and its peripheral configuration are different from those in each of the above embodiments. Hereinafter, the variable winning device 401 and its peripheral configuration according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26. 24A is a front view of the variable winning device 401 and its peripheral configuration, FIG. 24B is a sectional view thereof, FIG. 25A is a sectional view of the variable winning device 401, and FIG. A plan view of the peripheral configuration, FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 401 and its peripheral configuration. In these figures, the same components as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, in FIGS. 24 (b) and 25 (a), the left side flow path forming portion 131 is not shown for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 24A, the variable winning device 401 includes a plate-shaped base body 411, and the base body 411 is fitted into an opening formed at the lowermost portion of the game board 24. It is attached to the game board 24. As shown in FIG. 24B, the distance between the front surface portion 411a of the base body 411 and the window panel 62 is larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball can pass in front of the front surface portion 411a. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 24A and 24B, a first winning opening portion 403 is formed in the upper portion of the base body 411 so as to open toward the front of the gaming machine. The first winning opening portion 403 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its size (width dimension) is larger than that of two gaming balls when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and a plurality of gaming balls are simultaneously placed. It is possible to pass through.

Behind the first winning opening 403, as shown in FIG. 25A, the first winning ball that has entered the first winning opening 403 is guided downward to the back side of the game board 24. A ball passage 405 is formed. At a position in the middle of the first ball passage 405, a winning sensor 403a for the first large winning opening that detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first winning opening portion 403 is arranged.

As shown in FIG. 24B, a passage portion 408 through which a game ball can pass is formed in front of the base body 411 below the first winning opening portion 403. The bottom portion of the passage portion 408 is partitioned by the inner rail portion 51, and out ports 441 and 442 are arranged on the left and right sides of the passage portion 408 (see FIGS. 24 (a) and 26 (a)). These out ports 441 and 442 are provided below the out ports 141 and 171 in the second vertical wall portions 138 and 168 of the flow path forming portions 131 and 161, and all of them are sideways so as to face the passage portion 408 side. It is open.

At the center of the lower part of the passage portion 408, a second winning opening portion 404 is formed so as to penetrate the base body 411 in the thickness direction. The second winning opening portion 404 is formed as a horizontally long, substantially elliptical opening that opens forward, and its size (width dimension) is larger than that of two gaming balls when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. , Multiple game balls can pass at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 25A, a second ball passage 421 is provided on the back surface side of the base body 411 so as to communicate with the second winning opening portion 404. The second ball passage 421 extends rearward, and the game ball winning in the second winning opening portion 404 is guided backward along the passage bottom surface 421a after flowing into the second ball passage 421. At a position in the middle of the second ball passage 421, a winning sensor 404a for a second large winning opening that detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second winning opening portion 404 is arranged.

As described above, in the variable winning device 401 of the present embodiment, two winning openings 403 and 404 are provided as winning openings on which the game ball can win, and the large winning openings 402 are provided by these winning openings 403 and 404. It is configured. The winning sensor 403a for the first winning opening and the winning sensor 404a for the second winning opening are electrically connected to the main control device 81, and the detection areas of the winning sensors 403a and 404a for the winning openings are detected. When the game ball passes, predetermined detection information (detection signal) is input to the main control device 81. The main control device 81 determines whether or not a prize has been won in the large winning opening 402 based on this detection information.

As shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, the variable winning device 401 is provided with an opening / closing member 431 so as to correspond to the first winning opening portion 403 and the second winning opening portion 404.

The opening / closing member 431 includes a first opening / closing plate 432 that opens / closes the first winning opening 403, and can rotate in the front-rear direction about a rotation axis provided at the lower end of the first winning opening 403. ing. Due to this forward / backward rotation, the first opening / closing plate 432 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 24 (front surface portion 411a of the base body 411) (see FIGS. 25 (a) and 26 (b)) and the game. It can be displaced to the retracted position (see FIGS. 24 (b) and 26 (a)) in which protrusion from the front surface of the board 24 is suppressed.

When the first opening / closing plate 432 is located in the retracted position, the first opening / closing plate 432 covers the first winning opening portion 403 from the front, so that the winning of the game ball to the first winning opening portion 403 is restricted. The first winning opening 403 is closed. At that time, the front surface portion 432b of the first opening / closing plate 432 is located flush with the front surface of the gaming board 24 or on the back surface side of the gaming machine with respect to the front surface of the gaming board 24. When the opening / closing member 431 rotates forward from this state and the first opening / closing plate 432 is positioned at the protruding position, the game ball is allowed to win the first winning opening portion 403, and the first winning opening portion 403 is opened. It becomes an open state. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to configure the first winning opening portion 403 so that the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and it may be possible to win a prize in a range where it is difficult to win the prize as compared with the open state.

As shown in FIG. 26 (a), the front surface portion 432b of the first opening / closing plate 432 is provided with a second opening / closing plate 433 that opens / closes the second winning opening portion 404. The second opening / closing plate 433 is formed so as to project forward from the front surface portion 432b of the first opening / closing plate 432 when the first opening / closing plate 432 is in the retracted position. The depth dimension of the second opening / closing plate 433 (the amount of forward protrusion from the first opening / closing plate 432) is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball can be placed on the second opening / closing plate 433.

The second opening / closing plate 433 is integrated with the first opening / closing plate 432, and is configured to rotate back and forth with the rotation of the opening / closing member 431. Due to this forward / backward rotation, the second opening / closing plate 433 projects forward from the front surface of the game board 24 (front surface portion 411a of the base body 411), and the upper surface portion 433b thereof protrudes upward (FIGS. 24 (b) and 26. (A)) and the protrusion of the second opening / closing plate 433 are suppressed, and the upper surface portion 433b can be displaced to a retracted position (see FIGS. 25 (a) and 26 (b)) in which the upper surface portion 433b tilts forward. ..

The second opening / closing plate 433 extends in the left-right direction, and more specifically, the left-right end portions thereof are located in the vicinity of the second vertical wall portions 138 and 168 of the flow path forming portions 131 and 161. Further, as shown in FIG. 24B, the depth dimension of the second opening / closing plate 433 (the protruding length from the first opening / closing plate 432) is the front end portion 433a of the second opening / closing plate 433 and the window panel 62 at the protruding position. The interval (distance) D1 is set to be less than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, when the second opening / closing plate 433 is located at the protruding position and the passage portion 408 is covered from above by the second opening / closing plate 433, the game ball can be seen from either the front or the side of the second opening / closing plate 433. It cannot flow into the passage portion 408, and the inflow of the game ball into the passage portion 408 is restricted. As a result, the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening 404 is restricted, and the second winning opening 404 is closed. It should be noted that it is not always necessary that the game ball cannot be won in the second winning opening portion 404 when it is in the closed state, and it may be possible to win in a range where it is harder to win than in the open state.

Further, when the second opening / closing plate 433 is in the protruding position, the second opening / closing plate 433 protrudes forward of the gaming machine, so that the gaming ball can be received by the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening / closing plate 433. It has become. That is, the second opening / closing plate 433 functions not only as an opening / closing portion for opening / closing the second winning opening portion 404, but also as a ball receiving portion for receiving the game ball. As shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, the game ball received by the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening / closing plate 433 is the upper surface portion in the process of the second opening / closing plate 433 being displaced from the protruding position to the retracted position. It falls downward from 433b. As a result, the game ball flows into the passage portion 408, and it becomes possible to win a prize in the second winning opening portion 404. A plurality of convex portions 215 (deceleration means) are provided on the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening / closing plate 433, and the staying period of the game ball on the second opening / closing plate 433 is extended.

As shown in FIG. 25 (a), when the second opening / closing plate 433 is located at the retracted position, the first opening / closing plate 432 is located at the protruding position. The distance D2 between the upper end portion 432a of the opening / closing plate 432 and the window panel 62 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball can pass in front of the first opening / closing plate 432. At that time, in the second opening / closing plate 433, as shown in FIG. 25B, the central portion 433c protrudes forward from the first opening / closing plate 432, and the distance from the window panel 62 becomes narrow, but both the left and right sides are narrowed. Is located behind the first opening / closing plate 432. In these portions, the distance from the window panel 62 becomes larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball that has passed in front of the first opening / closing plate 432 flows into the passage portion 408 through the portion.

In this way, when switching from the protruding position of the second opening / closing plate 433 to the retracting position and during the period when the second opening / closing plate 433 is maintained in the retracting position, winning of the game ball to the second winning opening portion 404 is permitted. Then, the second winning opening portion 404 is opened. However, the winning of the second winning opening portion 404 due to the fall from the second opening / closing plate 433 occurs only when the second opening / closing plate 433 is switched from the protruding position to the evacuation position, and the maintenance period to the evacuation position is performed. In, the winning of the second winning opening portion 404 occurs only when the game ball passes in the vicinity of the window panel 62. Therefore, the winning probability of the game ball to the second winning opening 404 is lower than the winning probability to the first winning opening 403.

Here, as shown in FIG. 24A, the second opening / closing plate 433 has a front view mountain shape, and is received by the upper surface portion 433b as in the shutter 216 according to the first embodiment. It is possible to guide the game ball to the out ports 141 and 171. Regarding the positional relationship between the two, such as the height position of the second opening / closing plate 433 with respect to the out openings 141 and 171 and the distance between the out openings 141 and 171 and the second opening / closing plate 433, the shutter according to the first embodiment is described. Since it is the same as the case of 216 and the out ports 141 and 171, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 24B, a variable winning drive unit 419 for driving the opening / closing member 431 is attached to the back surface side of the base body 411. The variable winning drive unit 419 has a solenoid as a drive source and a link mechanism as a drive force transmission means for transmitting the drive force from the solenoid to the opening / closing member 431. The solenoid is electrically connected to the main control device 81 and is driven based on a drive signal from the main control device 81. By driving the solenoid, the first opening / closing plate 432 is set to the retracted position and the second opening / closing plate 433 is set to the protruding position, the first opening / closing plate 432 is set to the retracting position, and the second opening / closing plate 433 is set to the retracting position. The opening / closing member 431 rotates in the state, and switches from the closed state in which the winning openings 403 and 404 (large winning openings 402) are closed to the open state in which they are opened. When the output of the drive signal from the main control device 81 is stopped, the opening / closing member is in a state where the first opening / closing plate 432 is in the retracted position and the second opening / closing plate 433 is in the protruding position due to the urging force of the urging means (spring or the like). 431 returns and switches from the open state to the closed state.

In the present embodiment, since a part of the game ball that has flowed into the passage portion 408 can be discharged through the out openings 441 and 442, the through hole provided in the lower center of the passage portion 408 is used as the second winning opening portion 404. Although it functions, as shown in FIG. 27, the out openings 441 and 442 may be omitted, and the second winning opening portion 404 may be opened upward. In addition, in FIG. 27, in order to make the second winning opening portion 404 easy to understand, the illustration of the second opening / closing plate 433 is omitted.

Next, the distribution of the jackpot type according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the distribution table. The distribution table is a table for distributing the types of jackpot results based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and is stored in the distribution table storage area 113b (see FIG. 8) of the ROM 113.

As shown in FIG. 28, in the distribution table in the present embodiment, the types of the jackpot result are the explicit 15R probability variation jackpot result (explicit high probability corresponding game result) and the unspecified 15R probability variation jackpot result (unspecified high probability). The corresponding game result or the result of the latent probability change state) and the 15R normal jackpot result are set.

The explicit 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the winning / losing lottery becomes a big hit state winning and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. The unspecified 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. The 15R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

In the unspecified 15R probability variation jackpot result, the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, but the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode as in the case of the 15R normal jackpot result. Then, as a gaming state, it is possible to create a gaming state in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode even though the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is common to the low frequency support mode. As a result, the player can make the unspecified 15R probability variation jackpot result and the 15R normal jackpot result indistinguishable or difficult to distinguish, and it is interesting to predict whether the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. Can be granted.

In the distribution table shown in FIG. 28, among the values of "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" corresponds to the explicit 15R probability variation jackpot result, and "10 to 19" corresponds to the unspecified 15R probability variation jackpot. Corresponding to the result, "20-29" corresponds to the 15R normal jackpot result, but the distribution of these numerical values is arbitrary.

Next, in the present embodiment, each control process executed by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81 will be described.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. This process is executed in step S305 of the game turn control process (FIG. 14).

In the variation start process, first, in step S701, a win / fail determination process for determining whether or not the reserved information referred to in the current variation start process corresponds to the jackpot winning is executed. Specifically, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for determining the jackpot, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped. Then, when the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode, the winning / failing table for the low probability mode stored in the winning / failing table storage area 113a of the ROM 113 is referred to, and the information grasped above becomes the information corresponding to the jackpot winning. When the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the winning / failing table for the high-probability mode stored in the winning / failing table storage area 113a of the ROM 113 is referred to, and the above-mentioned grasped information is a big hit. Identify whether it is included in the information corresponding to the winning.

In the following step S702, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination process in step S701 is the result corresponding to the jackpot winning. If the result corresponds to the jackpot winning, the type determination process is executed in step S703.

In the type determination process, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for type determination, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Further, with reference to the distribution table (FIG. 28) stored in the distribution table storage area 113b of the ROM 113, it is specified whether the information for the type determination grasped above is included in the information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result. ..

In the following step S704, it is determined whether or not the type of the current jackpot winning is a probabilistic jackpot result based on the information specified in the type determination process in step S703. If it is a probability variation jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the probability variation jackpot is executed in step S705, and if it is not the probability variation jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the normal jackpot is executed in step S706. Further, if it is determined in step S702 that the jackpot is not won, the stop result setting process for the time of loss is executed in step S707.

In each stop result setting process of steps S705 to S707, information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 is referred to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 113. It is specified, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 114. Further, in steps S705 and S706, information for specifying in the MPU 112 that the hit / fail determination result of this game round is a jackpot result (explicit 15R probability variation jackpot flag, unspecified 15R probability variation jackpot flag, 15R normal jackpot). Flags) are stored in various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114.

After executing any of the processes of steps S705 to S707, in step S708, the variable display time setting process for displaying the variable is executed. In the following step S709, a variable command and a type command are set. The fluctuation command includes information on whether or not there is a big hit, information on whether or not reach has occurred, and information on the fluctuation display time. In addition, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes information on the explicit 15R probability variation jackpot result, information on the unspecified 15R probability variation jackpot, information on the 15R normal jackpot result, information on the deviation result, and the like as information on the game result.

The variation command and the type command set in step S709 are transmitted to the staging control device 82 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 13). The staging control device 82 transmits the fluctuation command and the type command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 212 grasps the fluctuation display pattern in the symbol display device 41 in the game round based on the received variation command and type command, and the symbol display device is executed so that the grasped variation display pattern is executed. The display of 41 is controlled. Then, in step S710, the main display unit 43 starts the variation display of the pattern, and then the variation start process is terminated.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening / closing process according to the present embodiment. Here, the processes of steps S801 and S802 shown in FIG. 30 are executed between steps S509 and S510 in the large winning opening opening / closing process of FIG. In step S509, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the variable winning device 401 based on the detection state of the winning sensors 403a and 404a for the large winning opening, and step S510 determines the value of the winning counter PC. It is a process to update.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S509, that is, when the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device 401 is detected, the winning is detected by the second large winning opening winning sensor 404a in step S801. It is determined whether or not the sensor has been used. As a result of the determination, if the game ball is detected by the second prize opening sensor 404a, the game ball is detected by the second prize opening sensor 404b in step S802, that is, the game ball is detected. , The second winning opening command indicating that the game ball has won is set in the second winning opening 404. The second winning opening command set in step S802 is output to the effect control device 82 in the external output process of step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 13).

After the execution of step S802 or when a negative determination is made in step S801, the process proceeds to step S510, and the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device 401 (large winning opening 402) is detected, it is determined whether or not the winning is to the second winning opening portion 404. I have to. However, the winning counter PC is updated in units of winning a prize in the large winning opening 402, without distinguishing between the first winning opening portion 403 and the second winning opening portion 404. Therefore, when the total number of winnings to each of the winning opening portions 403 and 404 reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 10 pieces, see step S506 in FIG. 16), the variable winning device 401 is used. It can be switched from the open state to the closed state.

<Notification effect control process>
Next, the notification effect control process executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the notification effect control process.

The notification effect control process is a process for performing a notification effect while the open / close execution mode is being executed, and is activated every predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec). In the notification effect control process, it is determined whether or not the predetermined notification effect execution condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the symbol display device 41 controls to execute the notification effect.

Specifically, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is being executed. This determination is made based on whether or not the opening command from the main control device 81 has been received. If it is determined that the player is not in the open / close execution mode, the notification effect control process is terminated. Determine if it is the result. This determination is made based on the type command from the main control unit 81.

As a result of the determination, if the current jackpot result is neither an unspecified probability variation jackpot result nor a normal jackpot result, that is, an explicit probability variation jackpot result, the present notification effect control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current jackpot result is either an unspecified probability variable jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S903, and it is determined whether or not the opening period is in progress. If it is determined that the opening period is in progress, the introduction effect setting process is executed in step S904.

Here, the introduction effect will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (a). The introduction effect is a game effect executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, and whether the game state (lottery mode) after the opening / closing execution mode ends is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. It is executed as a pre-production of the announcement effect to be clearly stated. In the introductory effect, an egg image 461 with a "?" Display and a warrior character image 462 with a sword are displayed. Although not shown, characters such as "It may be good if 20 or more game balls are won in the second winning opening 404 ..." are also displayed.

Further, in the introduction effect, the jackpot symbol image 463 showing the main symbol stopped and displayed on the effective lines L1 to L5 in the game times that resulted in the jackpot is displayed. In the case of the unspecified probability variable jackpot result in the present embodiment, the same even number symbol is stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 as in the case of the normal jackpot result. Therefore, it is not possible for the player to distinguish whether it is a probabilistic jackpot result or a normal jackpot result from the stop results on the effective lines L1 to L5.

Further, in the introduction effect, a count image 464 showing the number of winnings to the second winning opening portion 404 is displayed. When a prize is detected in the second winning opening portion 404 in the present embodiment, the warrior character image 462 is displayed to swing the sword down toward the egg image 461, and the numerical value displayed in the count image 464 is displayed. It will be counted up. These displays are notifications corresponding to the occurrence of a prize in the second winning opening portion 404.

Returning to the description of the notification effect control process of FIG. 31, in step S904 (introduction effect setting process), the display control device is such that the derivation effect of FIG. 32 (a) is performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. Set the output command to 212. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 based on the command.

After the execution of step S904 or when a negative determination is made in step S903, it is determined in step S905 whether or not the notification effect or the end effect described later has been executed. If those effects have been executed, the present notification effect control process is terminated. If the effects have not been executed, it is determined in step S906 whether or not the second winning opening command from the main control device 81 has been received. judge. The second winning opening command is output when the main control device 81 detects that the game ball has won the second winning opening 404, and the second winning opening command is received. In step S907, the value of the second winning counter SPC is incremented by 1 and updated. The second winning counter SPC is for managing the number of winning games balls to the second winning opening portion 404 in the staging control device 82, and is stored in the RAM 244. Further, in step S907, an output command to the display control device 212 is set so as to update the display of the count image 464 described above.

After the execution of step S907 or when a negative determination is made in step S906 (when a new second winning opening command has not been received), the process proceeds to step S908, and the value of the second winning counter SPC is a predetermined number (for example, 20). It is determined whether or not it is the above. If it is determined that the value of the second winning counter SPC is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the notification effect setting process is executed in step S909.

Here, the notification effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 (b) and 32 (c). The notification effect is a game effect that announces (clarifies) whether or not the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is finished is the high probability mode. When the jackpot result is an unspecified probability variation jackpot result, that is, when the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends is the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), " An image 465 in which the characters "probability change" appear is displayed, and a warrior character image 462 that looks happy is displayed. On the other hand, when the jackpot result is a normal jackpot result, that is, when the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends is the low probability mode, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), " An image 466 in which the characters "normal" appear is displayed, and a warrior character image 462 in which the characters are standing up is displayed. By looking at these displays, the player can clearly know whether the lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the high-probability mode or the low-probability mode.

Returning to the description of the notification effect control process of FIG. 31, in step S909 (notification effect setting process), the notification effect of FIG. 32 (b) or FIG. 32 (c) is displayed on the symbol display device 41 according to the type of the jackpot result. The output command to the display control device 212 is set so as to be performed on the screen G.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S908, that is, if the value of the second winning counter SPC is less than a predetermined number, the process proceeds to step S910, and the current round game is the round game of the predetermined number of rounds (for example, the 10Rth). Determine if it exists. If it is determined that the number of rounds is not the predetermined number, the notification effect control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of rounds is not the predetermined number, the end effect setting process is executed in step S911.

In the end effect, as shown in FIG. 32 (d), the egg image 461 in an unbroken state is displayed, and the warrior character image 462 in a drooping state is displayed. In this case, a question mark is attached to the egg image 461 so that the player cannot identify whether the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is finished is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. do. In this case, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the player proceeds with the game while it is uncertain whether or not the mode is in the high probability mode. In step S911 of FIG. 31, an output command to the display control device 212 is set so that the end effect is performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

As described above, in the present embodiment, if the number of winning balls to the second winning opening portion 404 does not reach the predetermined number by the end of the round game of the predetermined number of rounds, it is considered that the time has expired. It is configured to display the effect. For this reason, the player strongly desires that the winning of the second winning opening portion 404 is quickly achieved, and a feeling of impatience and tension is preferably aroused. As a result, it becomes possible to excite the game as compared with the case where the opening / closing execution mode is only vaguely digested.

After the execution of step S909 or step S911, "0" is input to the value of the second winning counter SPC in step S912 to clear the process. After that, the present notification effect control process is terminated.

<About the flow of the game>
Next, the flow of each game in the normal game state and the open / close execution mode will be described. In both the normal game state and the open / close execution mode, refer to FIG. 18 for the flow until the game balls flowing down the left side region PE2 and the right side region PE3 are concentrated in the arrangement area of the variable winning device 301. Since it is the same as the case of the first embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the flow of the game in the normal game state will be described with reference to FIG. 26 (a). In the normal game state, the open / close execution mode is not executed, and the variable winning device 401 continues to be closed. In this case, the closed state means that the rotation position of the opening / closing member 431 is such that the first opening / closing plate 432 closes the first winning opening portion 403 and the second opening / closing plate 433 closes the second winning opening portion 404. It is in the set state. In this state, as described above, the second opening / closing plate 433 functions as a ball receiving portion, and it becomes possible to receive the game ball flowing down the game area PE. Then, the game ball received by the second opening / closing plate 433 is guided to the out openings 141 and 171 by the second opening / closing plate 433 and enters the out openings 141 and 171. That is, the game balls collected in the arrangement area of the variable winning device 401 in the normal game state enter either the left or right out openings 141 or 171 and are discharged from the game area PE.

Next, the flow of the game in the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. 33. In FIG. 33, the “reaching ball” means a game ball that has reached the arrangement area of the variable winning device 401.

When the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, a round game is executed in which the variable winning device 401 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and then the switching control for switching to the closed state is performed at least once (once in the present embodiment). Further, in the open / close execution mode, such a round game is performed a plurality of times (15 times in the present embodiment).

In the open state of the variable winning device 401, the opening / closing member 431 is rotated forward (see FIG. 26B), so that the first winning opening portion 403 and the second winning opening portion 404 are opened, respectively. It is permissible to win a game ball in the winning openings 403 and 404. Therefore, the game ball that reaches the arrangement area of the variable winning device 401 at the timing when the variable winning device 401 is in the open state wins a prize in either the first winning opening portion 403 or the second winning opening portion 404 (FIG. 33). Timing t1 to t4). In this case, as described above, the winning probability of the game ball to the second winning opening 404 is lower than the winning probability to the first winning opening 403.

When the variable winning device 401 is in the closed state, both the first winning opening 403 and the second winning opening 404 are closed, while the second opening / closing plate 433 functions as a ball receiving portion. That is, the game ball that has reached the arrangement area of the variable winning device 401 at the timing set during the waiting period (the period in which the variable winning device 401 is closed and waiting for the start of the next round game) set between the previous and next round games. , It falls on the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening / closing plate 433. Then, when the next round game is started before the game ball reaches the out openings 141, 171 that is, that is, in a situation where the game ball is present on the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening / closing plate 433 (the variable winning device 401 is again used). When the game ball is switched to the open state), the game ball falls downward to win a prize in the second winning opening portion 404 (timing t5, t6 in FIG. 33).

If the game ball on the second opening / closing plate 433 reaches the out openings 141 and 171 before the next round game is started, the game ball is out without winning the second winning opening portion 404. It is discharged from the game area PE through the mouths 141 and 171. In this respect, in the present embodiment, the second opening / closing plate 433 is provided with the ridge portion 215 as a deceleration means, and the staying period of the game ball on the second opening / closing plate 433 is extended. That is, the game ball that has reached the arrangement area of the variable winning device 401 during the waiting period is given preferential treatment so that it can easily win the second winning opening portion 404.

In the above, the explanation was given for the waiting period between rounds, but the variable winning device 401 is arranged during the closing period (the period in which the variable winning device 401 is closed immediately before the start of the first round) before the execution of the first round. The same applies to the game ball that has reached the area. That is, when the first round game is started in a situation where the game ball is present on the second opening / closing plate 433, the game ball is awarded to the second winning opening portion 404.

As described above, in the present embodiment, not only when the variable winning device 401 is in the open state, but also when the game ball reaches the arrangement area of the variable winning device 401 when the variable winning device 401 is in the closed state, the variable winning device 401 is awarded. Is possible. If the number of winnings in the second winning opening 404 is 20 or more by the end of the 10th round game, a notification effect (FIG. 32) is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. It is executed, and notification corresponding to the lottery mode (game state) after the opening / closing execution mode ends is performed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A second opening / closing plate 433 is provided on the opening / closing member 431, and when the variable winning device 401 is in the closed state, the second opening / closing plate 433 functions as a ball receiving portion, and further, the second opening / closing plate 433 is switched from the closed state to the open state. 2 The game ball received by the opening / closing plate 433 can win a prize in the second winning opening portion 404.

When the open / close execution mode is executed, it is desirable for the player to achieve efficient winning of the large winning opening and to suppress unnecessary consumption of the game ball. For this reason, depending on the player, a so-called stoppage may be performed, such as refraining from launching a game ball at a timing at which a prize is unlikely to occur in the large winning opening. However, excessive technical intervention is not desirable because it impairs the fairness of the game.

In this respect, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, even if the game ball is launched at a timing at which the winning of the first winning opening portion 403 is unlikely to occur, the first winning / closing plate 433 (ball receiving portion) is used. 2 It is possible to make a prize in the winning opening portion 404. As a result, it becomes possible to efficiently obtain the privilege while suppressing the generation of waste balls, and the configuration can be configured to meet the needs of the player. Not only that, it is also possible to suppress the rampant strikes, which is advantageous in ensuring the fairness of the game.

Moreover, the game ball received by the second opening / closing plate 433 is configured to be able to win a prize in the second winning opening portion 404 instead of the first winning opening portion 403. For example, if a game ball falling from the second opening / closing plate 433 is configured to win a prize in the first winning opening portion 403, the winning destination becomes the same as the winning game ball due to the opening of the first winning opening portion 403. In the machine 10, it may be difficult to identify which route the winning game ball is. In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the winning destination of the game ball is different between the case where the winning is done by falling from the second opening / closing plate 433 and the case where the winning is done without going through the falling, any of the pachinko machines 10 is used. It becomes possible to easily identify whether the prize was won by the route. Therefore, the former case can be more easily advantageous than the latter case, and the configuration is advantageous in evoking a special feeling for winning through the fall from the second opening / closing plate 433.

Further, for example, in the configuration in which the game ball received by the second opening / closing plate 433 (ball receiving portion) is awarded to the first winning opening portion 403, the game ball heading to the first winning opening portion 403 through the ball receiving portion and the ball receiving portion. There is a concern that the game ball directly heading to the first winning opening portion 403 will interfere with each other and the winning of each will be hindered. In this respect, in the present configuration, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by separating the winning opening portion via the ball receiving portion and the winning opening portion not intervening.

By dropping the game ball received by the second opening / closing plate 433 downward, the second winning opening portion 404 is configured to win a prize. In this case, the game ball on the second opening / closing plate 433 can be guided to the second winning opening portion 404 by utilizing the forward rotation of the opening / closing member 431, and the configuration can be simplified. In addition, by switching from the closed state to the open state, the game ball received by the second opening / closing plate 433 is awarded to the second winning opening portion 404, and the ball receiving state of the second opening / closing plate 433 is reset. Can be done. As a result, when the variable winning device 401 is returned from the open state to the closed state, it becomes possible to start a new ball receiving with no game ball remaining on the second opening / closing plate 433.

Further, the second winning opening portion 404 is arranged below the second opening / closing plate 433 and is configured to open upward. In this case, the game ball dropped from the second opening / closing plate 433 can be easily won by the second winning opening portion 404. Moreover, the passage of the game ball from the second opening / closing plate 433 to the second winning opening portion 404 can be simplified, and the occupied area of the passage in the game area PE can be kept smaller than in the case where the passage becomes complicated. Will be possible. That is, it is possible to make an optimum configuration in a gaming machine in which the gaming area PE is limited.

When the opening / closing member 431 rotates forward to open the variable winning device 401, the distance D2 between the first opening / closing plate 432 and the window panel 62 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball. In this case, the game ball passes in front of the first opening / closing plate 432, and the second winning opening portion 404 can be won. That is, it is possible to expect double winning in the first winning opening 403 and the second winning opening 404, which is more interesting than a uniform game in which a game ball is inserted in one winning opening. Can be improved.

The game ball received by the second opening / closing plate 433 is led out to the out ports 141 and 171. In this case, when the open / close execution mode is not executed and the variable winning device 401 is continuously closed, the game ball received by the second open / close plate 433 is guided to the out openings 141 and 171 and appropriately discharged from the game area PE. can do. As a result, the game ball is suppressed from staying on the second opening / closing plate 433, and the ball clogging in the second opening / closing plate 433 and the peripheral region thereof is suppressed.

Further, the out ports 141 and 171 are arranged adjacent to the side of the opening / closing member 431. In this case, it is possible to facilitate the derivation of the game ball from the second opening / closing plate 433 to the out ports 141 and 171. Further, since the distance between the second opening / closing plate 433 and the out openings 141 and 171 becomes short, it is determined whether the game ball remains on the second opening / closing plate 433 or whether the ball has already entered the out openings 141 and 171. , It is possible to visually check without moving the line of sight, and it is possible to consolidate the points of interest. As a result, the distraction of attention is suppressed as compared with the case where visual recognition of various parts is required, and the player can easily concentrate on the game.

In addition, the out ports 141 and 171 are configured to open on the opening / closing member 431 side. In this case, the momentum of the game ball moving on the second opening / closing plate 433 can be used to smoothly enter the out openings 141, 171 and the flow of the game ball stagnates on the second opening / closing plate 433. It becomes possible to suppress that. Further, since the ball can be directly entered into the out ports 141 and 171 without changing the moving direction of the game ball, the structure for deriving the game ball to the out ports 141 and 171 can be simplified.

When a predetermined number of winnings to the second winning opening 404 are detected, a notification effect is executed to notify whether the result is a probabilistic jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, and the first winning opening portion 403 is configured. It is more advantageous for the player to win the second prize opening 404 than to win the prize. In this case, the second opening / closing plate 433 not only receives the game ball and suppresses the generation of wasted ball, but also depends on whether the game ball wins in the first winning opening portion 403 or the second winning opening portion 404. You can make the development of the game different (whether to proceed with the game knowing whether it is in the high probability mode or to proceed with the game uncertainly). That is, which of the winning openings 403 and 404 is a big concern for the player, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

In other words, the relationship between the first opening / closing plate 432 and the second opening / closing plate 433 in the present embodiment is that the opening / closing member 431 of the first opening / closing plate 432 is closed at the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening / closing plate 433. In some cases, it can be said that it stands up or protrudes upward and extends in the passage direction (direction toward the out ports 141 and 171) of the upper surface portion 433b. In this case, the opening / closing member 431 rotates to cause the game ball on the upper surface portion 433b to fall and flow down below the opening / closing member 431, while the first opening / closing plate 432 causes the new game ball to move to the opening / closing member 431. The inflow can be suppressed. As a result, the opportunity for the game ball to flow down below the opening / closing member 431 can be limited, and the joy when the game ball falls can be increased.

Further, the first opening / closing plate 432 is arranged so as to be separated from the rotating tip portion of the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening / closing plate 433 by the diameter or more of the game ball. It is located at the opposite end. Therefore, when the opening / closing member 431 is in the closed position (FIG. 24B), the game ball can be placed in front of the first opening / closing plate 432 on the upper surface portion 433b, and the opening / closing member 431 rotates forward ( (When it is located at the open position in FIG. 25A), it is possible to prevent the falling of the game ball from the upper surface portion 433b from being hindered by the first opening / closing plate 432. That is, it is possible to satisfactorily balance the function of dropping the game ball received on the upper surface portion 433b and the function of suppressing the further fall of the game ball.

Furthermore, the first opening / closing plate 432 extends over the entire length of the upper surface portion 433b in the passage direction. In this case, when the opening / closing member 431 is located at the open position, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the side of the first opening / closing plate 432 and flowing into the passage portion 408.

When the opening / closing member 431 is in the open position, the game ball is placed on the first opening / closing plate 432, and when the opening / closing member 431 returns to the closed position in that state, the first opening / closing plate is still placed on the opening / closing plate. The 432 may rotate backwards. In this case, the game ball may be caught between the first opening / closing plate 432 and the object behind the first opening / closing plate 432, resulting in ball biting. In this respect, in the above configuration, since a space portion (first winning opening portion 403 and first ball passage 405) capable of accommodating one or more game balls is provided behind the first opening / closing plate 432, the ball bites. It becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of.

<Modification 1 of the third embodiment>
In this modification, the configuration of the opening / closing member 431 is different from that of the third embodiment. Specifically, the gap dimension between the opening / closing member 431 and the window panel 62 when the opening / closing member 431 is located at the open position is the third embodiment. It is narrower than the case of the embodiment of. Hereinafter, this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 401 in the open state. In this figure, the same components as those of the third embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this modification, when the opening / closing member 431 rotates forward from the closed position (FIG. 24 (b)) and is displaced to the open position, the distance D2 between the upper end portion 432a of the first opening / closing plate 432 and the window panel 62 is set. The depth dimension of the first opening / closing plate 432 is set so as to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot pass in front of the first opening / closing plate 432 (opening / closing member 431) and does not flow into the passage portion 408 below the opening / closing member 431.

As described above, in this modification, even if the opening / closing member 431 rotates forward to the rotation position for opening the first winning opening 403, the second winning opening 404 is not opened and the first winning opening 403 is opened. Only is open. In this case, the winning opportunity to the second winning opening 404 can be limited only when switching from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball is dropped from the second opening / closing plate 433 to the second winning opening 404. It will be possible to make the winning game stand out.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 431 is different from that of the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 401 in the closed state, FIG. 36A is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 401 in the open state A, FIG. 35B is a plan view thereof, and FIG. 37 is the open state B. It is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus 401 of. In these figures, the same components as those of the third embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The variable winning device 401 of the present embodiment includes two open states as open states. Specifically, there are an open state A (FIG. 36) in which the second winning opening portion 404 is in an open state and an open state B (FIG. 37) in which the first winning opening portion 403 is in an open state. Each of these open states A and B is realized by adjusting the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the opening / closing member 431 in the variable winning device 401. As a state other than the open states A and B, a closed state (FIG. 35) in which both the first winning opening portion 403 and the second winning opening portion 404 are closed can be taken. Since it is the same as the closed state (FIG. 24 (b)) according to the embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted. In the closed state shown in FIG. 35, the distance D1 between the front end portion 433a of the second opening / closing plate 433 and the window panel 62 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (b), in the open state A, the amount of rotation of the opening / closing member 431 from the closed state to the front of the gaming machine is set as the first rotation amount, so that the second winning opening portion 404 While allowing the winning of the game ball to the first winning opening 403, the winning of the game ball to the first winning opening 403 is not allowed. That is, the first rotation amount suppresses the opening degree of the first winning opening portion 403 within the range where the game ball cannot win the first winning opening portion 403, while suppressing the upper end portion 432a of the first opening / closing plate 432 and the window panel. The opening / closing member 431 is rotated so that the distance D3 from the 62 and the distance D4 between the left and right end portions 433d and 433e of the second opening / closing plate 433 and the window panel 62 are equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball. When the distances D3 and D4 are equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, first, the game ball flowing down from above the opening / closing member 431 passes in front of the first opening / closing plate 432 and reaches the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening / closing plate 433. It will be listed. The game ball mounted on the upper surface portion 433b moves toward the left end portion 433d or the right end portion 433e along the inclination of the upper surface portion 433b, and falls below the opening / closing member 431 through the front regions of the end portions 433d and 433e. do. In this way, the ball passage 471 through which the game ball can pass is formed, and the game ball can be won in the second winning opening portion 404.

If the game ball is placed on the second opening / closing plate 433 immediately before switching from the closed state to the open state A, the game ball falls downward from the second opening / closing plate 433 in the process of switching to the open state A. Then, it becomes possible to win a prize in the second winning opening portion 404.

As shown in FIG. 37 (a), in the open state B, the rotation amount of the opening / closing member 431 from the closed state to the front of the gaming machine is set to a second rotation amount larger than the first rotation amount. While allowing the winning opening portion 403 to win a prize, the winning opening portion 404 is not allowed to win a game ball. That is, the second turning amount is set to the second winning opening 404 while the first opening / closing plate 432 opens the first winning opening 403 to the extent that the game ball is allowed to win the first winning opening 403. The opening / closing member 431 is rotated so that the passage portion 408 (see FIG. 24B) connected to the passage portion 408 is covered from above by the first opening / closing plate 432. In the first opening / closing plate 432, when the opening / closing member 431 rotates to the rotation position in the open state B, the distance D5 between the upper end portion 432a of the first opening / closing plate 432 and the window panel 62 is a game. Its dimensions are set so that it is less than the diameter of the sphere.

Here, since the second rotation amount makes the forward rotation amount of the opening / closing member 431 from the closed state larger than the first rotation amount, the switching from the closed state to the open state B goes through the open state A. It is supposed to be done. At that time, the period of the open state A is configured to be shorter than the period of the open state B (the period maintained in the open state B).

Further, as shown in FIG. 37 (b), when the game ball is placed on the second opening / closing plate 433 immediately before the switch from the closed state to the open state B, the game ball is in the process of switching to the open state B. Will fall downwards, and it will be possible to win a prize in the second winning opening portion 404. That is, in the situation where the variable winning device 401 is in the open state B, the winning of the second winning opening 404 is not allowed, but when switching to the open state B, the winning of the second winning opening 404 is allowed.

In the present embodiment, the variable winning drive unit 419 includes a stepping motor as a drive source. The stepping motor is electrically connected to the main control device 81 and is driven based on a drive signal from the main control device 81. Specifically, when the first drive signal is output from the main control device 81, the opening / closing member 431 is rotated so that the variable winning device 401 is in the open state A, and the second drive signal from the main control device 81. Is output, the opening / closing member 431 is rotated so that the variable winning device 401 is in the open state B. Further, when the return signal is output from the main control device 81, the opening / closing member 431 is rotated so that the variable winning device 401 is closed.

Next, the distribution of the jackpot type according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 38 (a). FIG. 38A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the distribution table.

In the distribution table of the present embodiment, two types, an unspecified 15R probability variation jackpot result A and an unspecified 15R probability variation jackpot result B, are set as corresponding to the unspecified 15R probability variation jackpot result. Further, two types, a normal jackpot result A and a normal jackpot result B, are set as corresponding to the 15R normal jackpot result.

The symbol displayed on the main display unit 43 is different between the case where the jackpot type is the unspecified 15R probability variation jackpot result A and the case where the jackpot type is the unspecified 15R probability variation jackpot result B. The same symbol combination may be stopped and displayed on the device 41 (for example, the symbol combination of "444" is used in both the unspecified 15R probability variation jackpot result A and the unspecified 15R probability variation jackpot result B. Can be displayed). As a result, it is difficult or impossible to identify which jackpot result is from the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 41, and it is suppressed that the player can easily grasp the jackpot type. The same applies to the normal jackpot results A and B, and the symbols that are stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 are different, but the same symbol combination may be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 41. It has become.

The explicit 15R probability variation jackpot result is the same as the distribution table (FIG. 28) of the third embodiment.

Next, the relationship between the jackpot type and the open state of the variable winning device 401 will be described with reference to FIG. 38 (b). FIG. 38 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between them.

When the jackpot type is an unspecified 15R probability variable jackpot result A or a 15R normal jackpot result A, the variable winning device 401 is opened in the open state A in the open / close execution mode corresponding to those jackpot results. In the open state A, the second winning opening portion 404 is opened. However, when the game ball wins in the second winning opening portion 404, the second winning opening portion 404 is the same as in the case of the third embodiment. It is detected by the winning sensor 404a for the two major winning openings. Then, when the winning of a predetermined number or more of the game balls is detected in the second winning opening portion 404 during the execution of the opening / closing execution mode, the notification effect shown in FIGS. 32 (b) and 32 (c) is executed. , The lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is completed is notified. As a result, the player can clearly know whether the lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the high-probability mode or the low-probability mode.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is an unspecified 15R probability variable jackpot result B or a 15R normal jackpot result B, the variable winning device 401 is opened in the open state B in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to those jackpot results. Although it is expected that the second winning opening 404 will be awarded when switching from the closed state to the open state B, after the transition to the open state B, the second winning opening 404 will not be allowed to win, so it will be opened. Compared to the state A, it is less likely that a prize will be given to the second winning opening portion 404. Therefore, when the jackpot type is an unspecified 15R probability variation jackpot result B or a 15R normal jackpot result B, the end effect shown in FIG. 32 (d) is likely to be executed, and whether the lottery mode is a high probability mode. There is an increased possibility that the player will proceed to the game after the opening / closing execution mode ends without the player clearly grasping whether or not.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the open state A is more advantageous than the open state B because the probability that the lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is known increases. For this reason, the fun of playing the game with the expectation that the variable winning device 401 will be opened in the open state A is imparted, and the degree of attention to the game is suitably increased.

The open state shown in FIG. 38B may target all round games executed in the open / close execution mode, or may target some round games. For example, when the jackpot type is unspecified 15R probability variation jackpot result B or 15R normal jackpot result B, the variable winning device 401 is opened in the open state B in all round games in the open / close execution mode, and the unspecified 15R probability variation When the jackpot result A or the 15R normal jackpot result A is obtained, the variable winning device 401 is opened in the open state A in the round games from the first round to the tenth round, and the remaining round games are opened in the open state B. It can be an aspect of the above.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

There are a plurality of open states, a closed state in which both the first winning opening 403 and the second winning opening 404 are closed, an open state A in which the second winning opening 404 is open, and the first. The structure is such that the winning opening portion 403 can be switched to the open state B, which is the open state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the winning mode of the game ball and improve the interest of the game, as compared with the uniform game in which only the game ball is inserted into one winning opening. Moreover, since such switching is realized by one opening / closing member 431, when the opening / closing member 431 operates, the winning opening portion that switches to the open state is not uniquely determined, and any of the winning opening portions 403 and 404 It is possible to add fun to predict whether it will be in an open state. In addition, since it is more advantageous for the player to win the game ball in the second winning opening 404 than to win the game ball in the first winning opening 403, it is in either the open state A or B. Is a big concern for players. As a result, it is expected that the player will be more interested in the behavior of the opening / closing member 431, and it will be possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

When the variable winning device 401 switches from the closed state to the open state B, the variable winning device 401 goes through the open state A. In this case, the behavior of the opening / closing member 431 up to the middle of switching to the open state B can be matched with the behavior of the opening / closing member 431 when switching from the closed state to the open state A. At this time, during the period in which the behaviors of the opening / closing members 431 match, it is not possible for the player to determine which of the open states A and B is. This avoids the situation where the winning openings 403 and 404 in the open state are found early from the behavior of the opening / closing member 431, and enhances the fun of predicting which winning opening 403 and 404 will be in the open state. be able to.

When switching to the open state B via the open state A, the period of the open state A is shorter than the period of the open state B. For example, if the period in which the open state A is set is longer than the period in which the open state B is set, the game ball is likely to win a prize in the second winning opening portion 404. As a result, the difference from the open state B may be ambiguous, and the significance of providing the open state B may be impaired. In this respect, according to this configuration, the probability of winning a game ball to the second winning opening portion 404 can be suppressed to a low level even though the configuration is such that the game passes through the open state A, and appropriate differentiation from the open state B can be achieved. It will be possible.

<Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment>
This modification is different from the fourth embodiment in that the open state of the variable winning device 401 is changed in one round game. Hereinafter, this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 39 (a). FIG. 39A is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 401 during one round game.

In this modification, when one round game is started, the variable winning device 401 is first switched from the closed state to the open state A (see FIG. 36) in which the second winning opening portion 404 is opened. Then, in the middle of the one round game, the variable winning device 401 is switched from the open state A to the open state B (see FIG. 37) in which the first winning opening portion 403 is in the open state. After that, the variable winning device is based on the condition that the end condition of the round game is satisfied (the number of winning balls to the variable winning device 401 reaches a predetermined upper limit number or the opening period reaches a predetermined upper limit period). The 401 is switched from the open state B to the closed state, and the round game ends.

Since the open state of the variable winning device 401 changes in the middle of the round game in this way, it is expected that the player carefully observes the behavior of the opening / closing member 431, and it becomes possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the game. .. In addition, compared to conventional gaming machines that only open or not open the variable winning device 401, it is possible to diversify the flow of game balls and the winning mode for the variable winning device 401, and it is possible to improve the interest. become.

Switching from the open state A to the open state B in the above case is arbitrary as long as the maintenance period of the open state A (the period during which the second winning opening portion 404 is kept open) is secured to some extent. For example, it is performed based on the fact that the number of winning games balls to the variable winning device 401 reaches a predetermined number less than the upper limit number, or the execution period of the open state A (the period during which the second winning opening portion 404 is opened). ) Can be performed based on the fact that a predetermined period shorter than the upper limit period is reached, or based on the fact that both of them are satisfied.

Further, when switching from the open state A to the open state B, the variable winning device 401 is shifted from the open state A to the open state B without returning to the closed state. In this case, the amount of rotation of the opening / closing member 431 until the open state B can be reduced as compared with the case where the variable winning device 401 is returned to the closed state and then moved to the open state B, and the state can be switched quickly. become. Further, by not interposing the closed state, the generation of waste balls (the occurrence of the event that the game ball enters the out openings 141 and 171) is suppressed, and the variable winning device 401 can efficiently win the game ball. become.

It should be noted that the change in the open state does not necessarily have to be performed in all round games in the open / close execution mode, and may be configured to be performed only in some round games, for example, as shown in FIG. 39 (b). That is, the change in the open state may be a configuration that is performed in at least a part of the round games in the open / close execution mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 39 (c), when the open state of the variable winning device 401 is changed in a plurality of round games, the change pattern of the open state may be different. In this case, the method of changing the open state differs depending on the round, which is effective in diversifying the winning mode of the game ball to the variable winning device 401.

<Modification 2 of the fourth embodiment>
This modification is different from the fourth embodiment and the first modification thereof in that the open state of the variable winning device 401 is changed in round units. Hereinafter, this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between each round and the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 401.

When the open / close execution mode is executed, the variable winning device 401 is opened in the open state A in the first round game, and is opened in the open state B in the second round game unlike the case of the first round. To. Further, in the third round round game, the variable winning device 401 is opened in the open state A, and in the fourth round round game, it is opened in the open state A as in the case of the third round.

In this way, the open state of the variable winning device 401 differs depending on the round, so that the winning mode of the game ball to the variable winning device 401 differs depending on the round. As a result, the way of enjoying the round game can be diversified and the hobby can be improved as compared with the case where the same round game is simply repeated as the opening / closing execution mode progresses.

In the above case, when switching from the first round to the second round, the variable winning device 401 is shifted from the open state A to the open state B without returning to the closed state. That is, in the second round game, since the first winning opening portion 403 is opened, a closed state of the first winning opening portion 403 is required as a preliminary state thereof. It is considered that this is achieved by the open state A performed in the round game of the round (in the open state A, the first winning opening portion 403 is closed (see FIG. 36)), and the closed state is restored. It shifts to the open state B without letting it.

In this case, the amount of rotation of the opening / closing member 431 until the open state B can be reduced as compared with the case where the variable winning device 401 is returned to the closed state and then moved to the open state B, and the state can be switched quickly. become. Further, the open state A of the first round also serves as a waiting period immediately before the start of the second round (a period of waiting for the start of the second round game with the first winning opening portion 403 closed). The first round can be seamlessly transitioned to the second round, or the second round can be started instantly after the end of the first round, eliminating or making the waiting period substantially shorter. ..

As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of waste balls (occurrence of an event in which a game ball enters the out openings 141 and 171), and it is possible to promote efficient winning of the variable winning device 401. In addition, the opening / closing execution mode can be advanced at a good tempo, and the time efficiency when playing a game can be improved.

Further, even when switching from the second round to the third round, the variable winning device 401 is shifted from the open state B to the open state A without returning to the closed state. Thereby, the same effect as the above case can be expected.

<Modification 3 of the fourth embodiment>
This modification is different from the modifications 1 and 2 of the fourth embodiment in that the open states A and B are switched by switching the rotation direction of the opening / closing member 431 from the closed state. Hereinafter, this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. FIG. 41 is a perspective view of the opening / closing member 431 according to the present modification, and FIG. 42 is an explanatory view for explaining an operation mode of the opening / closing member 431. In these figures, the same components as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 41, in this modification, the second opening / closing plate 483 of the opening / closing member 431 has a flat plate shape. That is, the second opening / closing plate 483 is configured such that the upper surface portion 483b extends linearly (substantially horizontal) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The second opening / closing plate 483 has a size capable of covering the passage portion 408 (see FIG. 24B) connected to the second winning opening portion 404 from above and closing the passage portion 408.

The opening / closing member 431 is rotatable in the front-rear direction about a rotation shaft portion 431a provided at the lower end of the first opening / closing plate 432, and the first opening / closing plate 432 and the second opening / closing plate 432 and the second opening / closing plate 432 are rotated along with the front-rear rotation. The opening / closing plate 483 is designed to rotate integrally. Although not shown, the game board 24 is provided with flow path forming portions 131 and 161 as in other embodiments, and out ports 141 and 171 are arranged on the left and right sides of the opening / closing member 431. ing.

Next, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 431 will be described with reference to FIG. 42. Also in this modification, the open state includes the open state A in which the second winning opening portion 404 is in the open state and the open state B in which the first winning opening portion 403 is in the open state, and is in the closed state. It is possible to switch between the open state A and the open state B.

In the closed state, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), the first opening / closing plate 432 covers the first winning opening portion 403 from the front, and the second opening / closing plate 483 covers the passage portion 408 from above. As a result, the winning of the game ball to the first winning opening 403 and the second winning opening 404 is not allowed, and both winning openings 403 and 404 are closed. In the closed state, the second opening / closing plate 483 projects forward, so that the game ball flowing down from above can be received by the upper surface portion 483b of the second opening / closing plate 483. The game ball received by the upper surface portion 483b moves in the left-right direction by moving along the upper surface portion 483b, and is guided to the out ports 141 and 171.

As shown in FIG. 42 (b), when the opening / closing member 431 rotates forward from the closed state, the open state B is set. In the open state B, the first opening / closing plate 432 is tilted forward to open the first winning opening 403, and the game ball is allowed to win the first winning opening 403. Further, the first opening / closing plate 432 that has fallen forward covers the passage portion 408 from above, so that the second winning opening portion 404 is closed.

When the game ball is present on the upper surface portion 483b of the second opening / closing plate 483 when switching from the closed state to the open state B, the second opening / closing plate 483 rotates downward with the forward rotation of the opening / closing member 431. As a result, the game ball falls downward, and it becomes possible to win a prize in the second winning opening portion 404. That is, the game ball on the second opening / closing plate 483 has a winning opening portion (second) opposite to the winning opening portion (first winning opening portion 403) on the side that becomes the open state when switched to the open state B. It is possible to win a prize in the winning opening portion 404). Further, such a prize is not allowed after the switching to the open state B is completed, and is limited only in the switching process.

As shown in FIG. 42 (c), when the opening / closing member 431 rotates backward from the closed state, the open state A is set. In the open state A, the passage portion 408 is opened upward by the second opening / closing plate 483 in the upright posture, and the game ball is allowed to win the second winning opening portion 404. Further, the upright second opening / closing plate 483 covers the first winning opening portion 403 from the front, so that the first winning opening portion 403 is closed.

When the game ball is present on the upper surface portion 483b of the second opening / closing plate 483 when switching from the closed state to the open state A, the second opening / closing plate 483 rotates toward the first winning opening portion 403. As a result, the game ball is guided to the first winning opening portion 403, and the first winning opening portion 403 can be won. Such a prize is not allowed after the switching to the open state A is completed, and is limited only in the switching process.

In this modification, the second opening / closing plate 483 is formed into a flat plate shape when the game ball on the second opening / closing plate 483 is guided to the first winning opening portion 403 side. It moves to the left and right end side of 483 and suppresses spilling from the second opening / closing plate 483, but if such spilling does not occur or is within a range where it is unlikely to occur, the fourth embodiment described above. Similarly, the configuration may be such that it is inclined toward the out ports 141 and 171.

As described above, in this modification, the opening / closing member 431 is in the open state B when it is rotated forward, and is in the open state A when it is rotated backward. Therefore, the player is interested in the direction in which the opening / closing member 431 operates. It is expected that the player will pay close attention to the behavior of the opening / closing member 431. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game. Further, since which of the open states A and B is associated with the operating direction of the opening / closing member 431, it becomes easier for the player to intuitively grasp which state it is, and the playability is improved.

In the above modified example, when the switching to the open state A is completed, the game ball cannot be won in the first winning opening portion 403, but the present invention is not limited to this. 2 The configuration may be such that it is possible to win a prize within a range in which it is difficult to win a prize as compared with the winning opening portion 404. Similarly, even when the switching to the open state B is completed, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the game ball cannot be won in the second winning opening portion 404, as compared with the first winning opening portion 403. It may be configured so that it is possible to win a prize within a range where it is difficult to win a prize.

<Variation Example 4 of the Fourth Embodiment>
This modification is based on the modification 3 of the fourth embodiment, and devises a mode of switching between the open states A and B in the open / close execution mode. Hereinafter, this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 43 (a). FIG. 43 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the jackpot type and the open state of each round, and FIG. 43 (b) describes the relationship between the jackpot type and the number of times of switching to the open state A in the open / close execution mode. It is an explanatory diagram for this.

In this modification, even if a game ball is won in the second winning opening portion 404, the notification effect shown in FIG. 32 is not executed (of course, the introduction effect and the end effect are not executed), and the open / close execution mode is being executed. From the staging image displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, it is impossible or difficult to distinguish whether the lottery mode is the low probability mode or the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode is completed. It has become. Further, when the opening / closing member 431 is switched to either the open state A or B in one round game, that state is continued until the end of the round game. Further, as the jackpot type in this modification, the explicit 15R probability variation jackpot result, the unspecified 15R probability variation jackpot result, and the 15R normal jackpot result are set as in the case of the modification 1 of the third embodiment. (See FIG. 28).

As shown in FIG. 43 (a), in the open / close execution mode when the jackpot type is assigned to the unspecified 15R probability variation jackpot result, in the round game of the first round to the fourth round, the tenth round to the fifteenth round, The opening / closing member 431 is rotated forward to be in the open state B, and in the fifth to ninth rounds of the round game, the opening / closing member 431 is rotated backward to be in the open state A. On the other hand, in the open / close execution mode when the jackpot type is assigned to the 15R normal jackpot result, the opening / closing member 431 turns forward in the round game of the 1st round, the 3rd round, the 5th round, and the 7th to 15th rounds. It is moved to the open state B, and in the second round, the fourth round, and the sixth round, the opening / closing member 431 is rotated backward to be the open state A.

That is, the number of times the variable winning device 401 is switched to the open state A differs between the case where the jackpot type is assigned to the unspecified 15R probability variation jackpot result and the case where the jackpot type is assigned to the 15R normal jackpot result. Specifically, in the former case, the number of times of switching to the open state A is larger than the predetermined number of times (4 times in this modification), and in the latter case, the number of times of switching to the open state A is less than or equal to the predetermined number of times. It is configured as follows.

Such control is performed in each round based on, for example, information on the distribution result of the jackpot type such as the acquired value of the jackpot type counter C2 and the flag indicating the distribution result of the jackpot type by the main control device 81. This is realized by setting the opening mode of the opening / closing member 431.

With the above configuration, it is possible to add fun to guess the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is completed from the number of times of switching to the open state A (behavior of the opening / closing member 431). As a result, the player's interest in the behavior of the opening / closing member 431 can be greatly increased, and the degree of attention to the game can be suitably improved.

In this modification, the jackpot type and the number of times of switching to the open state A are associated with each other on a one-to-one basis, but as shown in FIG. 44, when the jackpot type is assigned to the unspecified 15R probability variation jackpot result. Is likely to occur when the number of switching to the open state A is larger than the predetermined number, and when the result is normally distributed to the 15R jackpot result, the number of switching to the open state A may be less than the predetermined number. The configuration may be easy.

Further, when the jackpot type is distributed to the unspecified 15R probability variation jackpot result, the number of switching to the open state B becomes larger than the predetermined number, and when the jackpot type is normally distributed to the 15R jackpot result, the open state B is reached. The number of times of switching may be less than or equal to a predetermined number of times.

Further, in this modification, for convenience of explanation, when the opening / closing member 431 is switched to either the open state A or B in one round game, that state is continued until the end of the round game. However, as in the first modification of the fourth embodiment, the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing member 431 may change in one round game. In this case, the number of times (total number) of switching to the open state A in the open / close execution mode may be different depending on whether the result is assigned to the unspecified 15R probability variation jackpot result or the 15R normal jackpot result. , The number of rounds including switching to the open state A may be different.

<Variation Example 5 of the Fourth Embodiment>
This modification is targeted at the round game of the predetermined round, and the variable winning device 401 is open depending on whether the jackpot type is assigned to the unspecified 15R probability variation jackpot result or the 15R normal jackpot result. It is different from the above-mentioned modification 4 in that it is different from the above-mentioned modification 4. Hereinafter, this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (a). FIG. 45A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the jackpot type and the open state in the 15th round.

In the opening / closing execution mode when the jackpot type is assigned to the unspecified 15R probability variation jackpot result in this modification, the opening / closing member 431 is rotated backward in the round game of the 15th round to be in the open state A. On the other hand, in the opening / closing execution mode when the jackpot type is assigned to the 15R normal jackpot result, the opening / closing member 431 is rotated forward in the round game of the 15th round to be in the open state B. In both the unspecified 15R probability variation jackpot result and the 15R normal jackpot result, the opening / closing member 431 is rotated forward to be in the open state B in the round game other than the 15th round.

With such a configuration, it is possible to add fun to guess the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is completed from the open state of the variable winning device 401 in the 15th round. As a result, as in the case of the above-mentioned modification 4, the player's interest in the behavior of the opening / closing member 431 can be greatly increased, and the degree of attention to the game can be suitably improved. In addition, since it is sufficient to pay attention to the behavior of the opening / closing member 431 in the predetermined round, the load on the player can be reduced as compared with the case where all the round games performed in the opening / closing execution mode are targeted. ..

In this modification, the predetermined round is the 15th round (final round), but the present invention is not limited to this, and any round can be used. However, if the result is usually a big hit and the player can guess it at a relatively early stage of the open / close execution mode, he / she may be disappointed and cannot fully enjoy the remaining open / close execution modes. The predetermined round is preferably a round game at the end of the open / close execution mode (the final round or the round game immediately before it).

Further, in this modification, the predetermined round is regarded as one round game, but it may be composed of a plurality of round games. Further, as in the case of FIG. 45 (b), there is no one-to-one correspondence between the jackpot type and the opening mode (whether the open state A or B is used) in the predetermined round, and the jackpot type is not specified 15R. In the case of being distributed to the probabilistic jackpot result, the variable winning device 401 may be more likely to be in the open state A in a predetermined round game than in the case of being distributed to the 15R normal jackpot result.

<Fifth Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different in that the variable winning device 401 according to the fourth embodiment is configured as a variable winning unit in which a plurality of variable winning devices are integrated. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG. 46A is a front view of the variable winning unit 501 and its peripheral configuration, and FIGS. 46B and 47 are cross-sectional views of the variable winning unit 501. In these figures, the same components as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 46 (a), the variable winning unit 501 includes a base body 411 similar to the variable winning device 401 according to the fourth embodiment. An upper large winning opening 505 that opens forward is formed in the upper part of the base body 411, and a lower large winning opening 506 that opens forward is formed in the lower part of the base body 411. The upper large winning opening 505 and the lower large winning opening 506 have the same configuration as the first winning opening portion 403 and the second winning opening portion 404 according to the fourth embodiment, and have the same configuration as the opening / closing member 431. Is opened and closed by. That is, the upper variable winning device 502 is configured by the upper large winning opening 505 and the opening / closing member 431, and the lower variable winning device 503 is configured by the lower large winning opening 506 and the opening / closing member 431.

The specific operation of the opening / closing member 431 for opening / closing the upper large winning opening 505 and the lower large winning opening 506 is to open / close the first winning opening portion 403 and the second winning opening portion 404 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 46 (b) and 47 (a) and (b), both the large winning openings 505 and 506 are closed and the lower large winning openings 506 are opened. It is possible to switch between the open state A and the open state B in which the upper winning opening 505 is opened.

When the game ball wins the upper prize opening 505 in the open state B shown in FIG. 47 (b), the first prize sensor 403a for the first prize opening provided in the first ball passage 405 behind the upper prize opening 505 It is detected. When the winning of the game ball to the upper large winning opening 505 is detected in this way, the first number (for example, 10) of the game balls is paid out from the payout control device 97.

On the other hand, in the open state A shown in FIG. 47 (a), when the game ball wins the lower large winning opening 506, it is for the second large winning opening provided in the second ball passage 421 behind the lower large winning opening 506. It is detected by the winning sensor 404a. When the winning of the game ball to the lower large winning opening 506 is detected in this way, the second number (for example, 15) of the game balls, which is larger than the first number, is paid out from the payout control device 97. That is, in the present embodiment, a large number of prize balls can be obtained by winning a game ball in the lower large winning opening 506, and it is better to make the lower large winning opening 506 win a prize in the upper large winning opening. It is more advantageous for the player than winning the prize in 505.

Further, if the game ball is placed on the second opening / closing plate 433 immediately before switching from the closed state to the open states A and B, the game ball falls downward in the process of switching to the open states A and B. It is possible to win a prize in the lower large prize opening 506. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode, the game ball that has reached the variable winning unit 501 during the waiting period (the period in which it is closed) between the previous round game and the next round game is moved to the lower large winning opening 506. It will be possible to win a prize.

By the way, when the open state A is set in the previous round game and the open state B is set in the next round game, the closed state is set as in the case of the modification 2 (FIG. 40) of the fourth embodiment. It may be possible to shift from the open state A to the open state B without returning. This allows the transition from the previous round to the next round without interruption, or the start of the next round instantly after the end of the previous round, eliminating or making the waiting period substantially shorter. be able to.

In this modification, the upper variable winning device 502 and the lower variable winning device 503 are treated as separate variable winning devices. Therefore, for example, the round is in the open state B (the upper large winning opening 505 is open). When a game is played, in the round game, the number of winning balls to the upper large winning opening 505 is a predetermined upper limit (for example, 10), or the duration of the open state B is a predetermined upper limit. It ends based on the period (for example, 30 sec). Similarly, even when the round game is performed in the mode of the open state A (the state in which the lower large winning opening 506 is open), the number of winning balls to the upper large winning opening 505 is the above-mentioned predetermined upper limit number. Or, the round game ends based on the fact that the duration of the open state B becomes the above-mentioned predetermined upper limit period.

In this modification, the notification effect (FIG. 32) based on the winning of the game ball to the lower large winning opening 506 may or may not be performed.

<Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment>
This modification is different from the fifth embodiment in that it does not have the open state A (the state in which the lower large winning opening 506 is open) shown in FIG. 47 (a). In this modification, the open state is only the open state B (the state in which the upper large winning opening 505 is open), and the state is switched between the closed state (FIG. 46 (b)) and the open state B. It is configured to be. That is, as in the case of the modification 1 (FIG. 34) of the third embodiment, the winning opportunity of the game ball to the lower large winning opening 506 is limited only when the game ball is switched to the open state B. As a result, it is possible to emphasize the game performance that is advantageous to the player as the number of game balls on the second opening / closing plate 433 increases at the time of the above switching.

<Sixth Embodiment>
This embodiment is based on the above-mentioned third embodiment, and the configuration of the ball receiver in the closed state is devised. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. (A) and (b) of FIG. 48 are perspective views of the opening / closing member 631 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 49 is a side view. In these figures, the same components as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. However, in the present embodiment, even if the game ball is won in the second winning opening 404, the notification effect is not executed, and the number of game balls to be paid out is also the game ball winning in the first winning opening 403. The number is the same as the case. That is, the degree of advantage for the player is the same at the time of winning the first winning opening 403 and at the time of winning the second winning opening 404.

As shown in FIG. 48 (a), the opening / closing member 631 of the present embodiment includes a long plate-shaped movable plate 651. Like the first opening / closing plate 432 and the second opening / closing plate 433, the movable plate 651 is arranged with the left / right direction of the gaming machine as the longitudinal direction, and the first opening / closing plate 432 and the second opening / closing plate 433 are arranged in the rotation direction of the opening / closing member 631. It is arranged between. One long side portion 652 of the movable plate 651 is provided with a cylindrical shaft portion (not shown) extending in the longitudinal direction of the movable plate 651, and the shaft portion is provided on the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening / closing plate 433. It is rotatably connected to the bearing portion 653. That is, as shown in FIG. 49, the movable plate 651 can rotate between the first opening / closing plate 432 and the second opening / closing plate 433 about a rotation shaft extending in the same direction as the rotation shaft of the opening / closing member 431. It has a simple structure. As a result, the movable plate 651 overlaps the front surface portion 432b of the first opening / closing plate 432 from the front (FIG. 48 (a)) and the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening / closing plate 433 from above (the state of overlapping the movable plate 651 from above. It is possible to switch to FIG. 48 (b)). As shown in FIG. 48 (b), the movable plate 651 has a size capable of covering substantially the entire surface of the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening / closing plate 433. In this embodiment, a drive source such as a solenoid for driving the movable plate 651 is not provided.

In the present embodiment, as the closed state in which the first winning opening portion 403 and the second winning opening portion 404 are closed, the closed state A shown in FIG. 48 (a) and the closed state B shown in FIG. 48 (b) are set. Have. These closed states A and B differ in whether or not the movable plate 651 overlaps the second opening / closing plate 433 from above. Specifically, the movable plate 651 does not overlap the second opening / closing plate 433. The case is the closed state A, and the overlapping cases are the closed state B.

As shown in FIG. 48 (a), in the closed state A, the movable plate 651 is in the upright state, so that the first surface portion 654 located on the second opening / closing plate 433 side of the movable plate 651 is exposed forward. In addition, the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening / closing plate 433 is exposed upward. In this case, the first surface portion 654 of the movable plate 651 is located flush with the front surface portion 411a of the base body 411 (front surface of the gaming board 24; see FIG. 24 (b)) or on the rear side of the gaming machine with respect to the front surface portion 411a. The game ball can pass in front of the first surface portion 654.

Therefore, in the above case, the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening / closing plate 433 is the first aspect in which the upper surface portion 433b functions as the ball receiving portion. The upper surface portion 433b of the second opening / closing plate 433 has a smooth flat surface shape, and when the game ball moves on the upper surface portion 433b, it is less likely to be caught. Further, the first surface portion 654 of the movable plate 651 also has a smooth flat shape, which also suppresses the catching of the game ball.

The surface portion 655 on the rotation tip side of the movable plate 651 is provided with an engaging portion 656 so as to project from the surface portion 655 in the direction of the radius of rotation of the movable plate 651. When the movable plate 651 is in the upright posture, the engaging portion 656 engages with the engaged portion 657 (see FIG. 49) provided on the base body 411 side of the variable winning device 401. This makes it possible to hold the movable plate 651 in an upright posture.

As shown in FIG. 48 (b), in the closed state B, the movable plate 651 is tilted toward the second opening / closing plate 433, so that the front surface portion 432b of the first opening / closing plate 432 is exposed forward and the first 2 In the opening / closing plate 433, the second surface portion 658 located on the first opening / closing plate 432 side is exposed upward. In this case, the second surface portion 658 of the movable plate 651 functions as a ball receiving portion in the second aspect. The second surface portion 658 of the movable plate 651 is provided with a plurality of ridges 660 extending in a direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the movable plate 651, and these ridges 660 are convex according to another embodiment. Similar to the strip 215, it functions as a deceleration means. That is, when the game ball is placed on the second surface portion 658, the movement of the game ball in the direction toward the out openings 141 and 171 is hindered by the convex portion 660, and the game ball is decelerated.

The front surface portion 432b of the first opening / closing plate 432 is provided with a plurality of groove portions 661 so as to correspond to the convex strip portion 660. Each groove portion 660 can accommodate each convex portion 660 when the opening / closing member 631 is in the closed state A.

Next, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 631 in the normal gaming state and the opening / closing execution mode will be described. Although not shown, the game board 24 is also provided with flow path forming portions 131 and 161 (see FIG. 5) in the present embodiment, and the game ball flowing down the game area PE is a variable winning prize. It is aggregated in the arrangement area of the device 401.

First, a case of a normal gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 (a) and 49. In the normal gaming state, the state of the opening / closing member 631 is maintained in the closed state in which the first winning opening portion 403 and the second winning opening portion 404 are closed. In this case, the movable plate 651 is held in an upright posture by engaging the engaging portion 656 and the engaged portion 657, and the opening / closing member 631 is in the closed state A. Under this closed state A, the upper surface portion 483b of the second opening / closing plate 433 functions as a ball receiving portion, so that the gaming balls concentrated in the arrangement region of the variable winning device 401 in the gaming region PE are the second opening / closing plate 433. It falls on the upper surface portion 483b and rolls on the upper surface portion 483b. As described above, since the upper surface portion 483b has a smooth flat surface, the game ball smoothly moves on the upper surface portion 483b and reaches the out openings 141 and 171 arranged on the left and right sides of the opening / closing member 431. You will be guided promptly.

Next, a case where the open / close execution mode is executed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an operation mode of the opening / closing member 631 in the opening / closing execution mode. Here, for convenience, it is assumed that the variable winning device 401 is opened once in one round game.

In the first round game, first, the opening / closing member 631 is rotated forward from the closed state A described above, and the first winning opening portion 403 is opened (FIGS. 50A and 50B). .. At this time, when the first opening / closing plate 432 presses the movable plate 651 from behind, the engaging portion 656 is disengaged from the engaged portion 657, and the movable plate 651 rotates forward together with the opening / closing member 631. After that, when the first opening / closing plate 432 rotates to the open position, the movable plate 651 rotates downward due to its own weight. As a result, the movable plate 651 is separated from the first opening / closing plate 432 and is in contact with the second opening / closing plate 433.

After that, when the end condition of the round game (the number of winning balls to the variable winning device 401 reaches a predetermined upper limit number or the opening period reaches a predetermined upper limit period) is satisfied, the opening / closing member 631 is in the above case. It is rotated in the opposite direction to return to the closed state (FIG. 50 (c)). At that time, the movable plate 651 rotates together with the opening / closing member 631 so as to lean against the second opening / closing plate 433. As a result, at the time of returning to the closed state, the movable plate 651 is in a state of being overlapped with the second opening / closing plate 433 from above, and the closed state of the opening / closing member 631 is switched to the closed state B.

In the closed state B, the second surface portion 658 of the movable plate 651 functions as a ball receiving portion, so that the game balls aggregated in the arrangement area of the variable winning device 401 in the game area PE are on the second surface portion 658 of the movable plate 651. It falls and rolls on the second surface portion 658. As described above, since the second surface portion 658 is provided with the convex portion 660 as a deceleration means, the moving speed of the game ball moving on the second surface portion 658 is decelerated by the convex portion 660. To. Therefore, the time required for the game ball to reach the out ports 141 and 171 is longer than in the closed state A, and the period of stay on the opening / closing member 631 is lengthened.

Then, when the second round game is started, the opening / closing member 631 is rotated forward again to switch from the closed state to the open state (FIG. 50 (d)). Along with this, the game ball on the movable plate 651 falls downward and wins a prize in the second winning opening portion 404. As described above, the closed state B is set in the waiting period immediately before the second round, and the staying period of the game ball on the opening / closing member 631 (movable plate 651) is extended. Therefore, the probability that the opening / closing member 631 is switched to the open state earlier than the game ball on the ball receiving portion reaches the out openings 141 and 171 increases, and the probability of winning the game ball to the second winning opening portion 404 increases. That is, the closed state B is more advantageous to the player than the closed state A.

After that, when the end condition of the round game is satisfied, the opening / closing member 631 is rotated in the opposite direction again to return to the closed state (FIG. 50 (e)). In this case as well, the closed state B is set as in the case of the end of the first round, and the period of stay of the game ball on the opening / closing member 631 (movable plate 651) is extended. After that, the same process is repeated until the end of the 14th round.

When the fifteenth round game is started, the opening / closing member 631 is rotated backward from the closed state B (FIG. 50 (e)) (FIG. 50 (f)). As a result, the first winning opening 403 is closed by the second opening / closing plate 433, and the second winning opening 404 is opened. In this case, the game ball mounted on the second surface portion 658 of the movable plate 651 at the start of the backward rotation wins the first winning opening portion 403. Further, with the backward rotation of the opening / closing member 631, the movable plate 651 falls backward and rotates toward the first opening / closing plate 432. After that, when the end condition of the round game is satisfied, the opening / closing member 631 rotates forward from the state of FIG. 50 (f) and returns to the closed state (FIG. 50 (g)). In this case, the movable plate 651 rises up together with the first opening / closing plate 432 so as to lean against the first opening / closing plate 432, whereby the switching to the closed state A is performed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

It is possible to switch between the case where the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening / closing plate 433 functions as a ball receiving portion (closed state A) and the case where the second surface portion 658 of the movable plate 651 functions as a ball receiving portion (closed state B). The configuration is such that the ease of movement of the game ball in the ball receiving portion in a predetermined direction (direction toward the out openings 141 and 171) can be changed.

In order to improve the winning efficiency of the game ball to the large winning opening 402 (reduce the number of out balls) in the open / close execution mode, the moving speed of the game ball passing through the ball receiving portion is reduced, and the game ball is placed on the ball receiving portion. It is desirable to stay longer. However, if the ball receiving portion has a structure that greatly decelerates the game ball, its action is exhibited even in the normal gaming state, so that the flow of the game ball on the ball receiving portion is stagnant in the normal gaming state, and the ball receiving portion There is a risk of ball jamming in and around it. For this reason, it is necessary to suppress the degree of deceleration to a small extent, or to configure the gaming ball so that it does not pass over the ball receiving portion in the normal gaming state, which is a limitation in designing the gaming machine.

In this respect, in the present embodiment, the ease of movement of the game ball on the ball receiving portion can be changed by switching between the closed state A and the closed state B, and the above restriction can be relaxed. As a result, in the open / close execution mode, the flow of the game ball on the ball receiving portion is stagnant, while in the normal gaming state, the flow of the game ball on the ball receiving portion can be smoothed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the winning efficiency of the game ball to the large winning opening 402 in the opening / closing execution mode while avoiding the influence on the normal gaming state.

The movable plate 651 is arranged in a rotatable state between the first opening / closing plate 432 and the second opening / closing plate 433, and the mode of the ball receiving portion is mechanically interlocked with the switching of the rotation direction of the opening / closing member 631. It was configured to switch. In this case, the switching control of the opening / closing member 631 (opening / closing control of the variable winning device 401) and the switching control of the ball receiving portion can be performed collectively. As a result, the control process can be simplified as compared with the case where the switching control is performed separately, and the processing load of the main control device 81 can be reduced. In addition, "mechanically interlocking" means interlocking without the intervention of an electric actuator.

As a mode of transition from the closed state to the open state, forward rotation and backward rotation of the opening / closing member 631 are provided, and when the opening / closing member 631 rotates forward, the closed state B is set, and when the opening / closing member 631 rotates backward, the closed state is set. The configuration is A. In this case, since the rotation direction of the opening / closing member 631 corresponds to the mode of the closed state, it is considered that the player who is interested in which of the closed states A and B will pay attention to the movement of the opening / closing member 631. It becomes possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game. Further, by controlling whether to rotate forward or backward at each opening / closing control, it is possible to control which of the closed states A and B is set. As a result, it is possible to suppress the standardization of the closed state switching pattern, for example, the closed state A and B are alternately switched each time the opening / closing control is performed, and it is possible to diversify the state switching pattern. Further, in the final round of the opening / closing execution mode, by rotating the opening / closing member 631 backward, it is possible to start the normal gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode ends in the state of returning to the closed state A. As a result, it becomes difficult for the game ball to pass through the ball receiving portion in the normal game state, and it is possible to suppress the inconvenience of inducing ball clogging or the like.

In the above embodiment, only the 15th round (final round) is in the closed state A, and all the other rounds are in the closed state B, but the rounds other than the 15th round are also in the closed state A. good. In this case, in order to diversify the rounds in the closed state B (or closed state A), a plurality of jackpot results are provided as the distribution results of the jackpot types, and the rounds in the closed state B (or closed state A) are set according to the jackpot results. The configuration should change. For example, in the case of the jackpot result A, the closed state B is set in each round from the 1st round to the 14th round (only the 15th round is the open state A), and in the case of the jackpot result B, the 1st round to the 10th round. It can be closed state B in each round (the remaining rounds are closed state A), and in the case of jackpot result C, it can be closed state A in all rounds. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to grasp in advance the round in the closed state A (the round in which the opening / closing member 631 rotates backward), the interest in the movement of the opening / closing member 631 can be further increased, and the game becomes monotonous. It is also effective in suppressing.

Further, the mode of the closed state in the open / close execution mode is different depending on whether the lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode, thereby suggesting the lottery mode. May be. In this case, the closed state in the predetermined round in the open / close execution mode may be different between the case where the lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the high probability mode and the case where the open / close execution mode becomes the low probability mode. As a result, not only is it enjoyed whether or not the closed state B is likely to win a prize in the large winning opening 402, but also the lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is predicted based on which closed state is reached. It can give fun. In this case, in the game times and open / close execution modes that result in big hits, the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 and the speaker do not notify the lottery mode after the open / close execution mode is completed. good. It should be noted that the notification is not performed until the above-mentioned predetermined round in the opening / closing execution mode is completed, including the game times that result in a big hit, and it is preferable to perform the notification after the start of the round to be executed next to the round. Further, instead of the lottery mode, a configuration suggesting a support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode may be used.

<Modification 1 of the sixth embodiment>
In this modification, the configuration of the opening / closing member is different from that of the sixth embodiment, and specifically, it is different in that it is based on the first embodiment. This modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. 51 (a) is a front view of the variable winning device 201 and its peripheral configuration according to this modification, (b) is a perspective view of the opening / closing member 731, and FIGS. 52 and 53 are AA of FIG. 51 (a). It is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus 401 corresponding to the line cross section. In these figures, the same components as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the opening / closing member 731 according to the present modification is provided with a plate-shaped shutter portion 732 so as to cover the large winning opening 202 (see FIG. 7B). The upper surface portion 732a of the shutter portion 732 has a smooth flat surface like the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening / closing plate 433 according to the sixth embodiment. The opening / closing member 731 is configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and has a protruding position protruding forward from the front portion 211a (front surface of the gaming board 24) of the base body 211 and retracting backward from the protruding position. However, it can be displaced to the evacuation position where the protrusion to the front of the gaming machine is suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 51 (b), a support portion 734 is provided on the upper surface portion 732a of the shutter portion 732 so as to stand upright. The support portion 734 is arranged near the rear end portion 732b of the shutter portion 732, and the front end portion 734a thereof is provided with a plurality of extension portions 735 extending forward. The length dimensions of these extending portions 735 in the front-rear direction are the same, and the front end portion 735a thereof is located behind the front end portion 732c of the shutter portion 732. As shown in FIG. 51 (a), the extending portions 735 have a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and are arranged at equal intervals. On the other hand, the base body 211 is formed with a plurality of slit portions 737 so as to correspond to the extension portion 735. Each slit portion 737 penetrates the base body 211 in the thickness direction, and each extension portion 735 can be inserted into each slit portion 737 from the rear of the base body 211.

In this modification, the closed state A shown in FIG. 52 (a) and the closed state B shown in FIG. 52 (b) are provided as the closed state in which the large winning opening 202 is closed. These closed states A and B differ in the amount of sliding forward (moving distance) of the opening / closing member 731 from the retracted position. Specifically, the closed state B has a sliding amount more than the closed state A. Is getting bigger.

In the closed state A shown in FIG. 52 (a), the front end portion 735a of each extending portion 735 is flush with the front portion 211a (front surface of the gaming board 24) of the base body 211, or slightly behind the gaming machine than the front portion 211a. It is located on the side. Therefore, in the closed state A, the flow of the game ball moving on the upper surface portion 732a of the shutter portion 732 is not obstructed or less likely to be obstructed by the extending portion 735. Further, as described above, since the upper surface portion 732a of the shutter portion 732 has a smooth planar shape, the game ball smoothly moves on the upper surface portion 732a and is arranged on the left and right sides of the opening / closing member 731. It is promptly guided to the mouths 141 and 171.

On the other hand, in the closed state B shown in FIG. 52B, the front end portion 735a of each extending portion 735 projects forward from the front end portion 211a (front surface of the game board 24) of the base body 211. Therefore, in the closed state B, each extension portion 735 functions as an obstruction part or an obstacle part that obstructs the flow of the game ball moving on the upper surface portion 732a of the shutter portion 732, and the game ball is caused by these extension portions 735. It will be decelerated. Therefore, the time required for the game ball to reach the out ports 141 and 171 is longer than in the closed state A, and the period of stay on the opening / closing member 731 is lengthened.

Also in this modification, the opening / closing member 731 is maintained in the closed state A in the normal game state, and the game balls gathered in the arrangement area of the variable winning device 401 are quickly guided to the out ports 141 and 171. On the other hand, in the opening / closing execution mode, the closed state B is set in each waiting period from the first round to the 14th round, and the staying period of the game ball on the opening / closing member 731 is extended. Then, as shown in FIG. 53, the game ball existing on the opening / closing member 731 at the start of the next round falls downward as the opening / closing member 731 retracts to the retracted position, and falls to the large winning opening 202. Win a prize. After that, when the 15th round game is completed, the closed state of the opening / closing member 731 is switched to the closed state A.

As described above, also in this modification, the ease of movement of the game ball in the ball receiving portion in a predetermined direction (direction toward the out ports 141 and 171) can be changed. As a result, in the open / close execution mode, the flow of the game ball on the ball receiving portion is stagnant, while in the normal gaming state, the flow of the game ball on the ball receiving portion can be smoothed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the winning efficiency of the game ball to the large winning opening 202 in the open / close execution mode while avoiding the influence on the normal game state.

In the above configuration, the open state A and B are switched by infesting the extension portion 735, but in the closed state A, the extension is made with a smaller amount of protrusion than in the open state B. The front end portion 735a of the portion 735 may be projected forward from the base body 211.

Further, in the above configuration, only the 15th round (final round) is set to the closed state A, and all the other rounds are set to the closed state B, but the rounds other than the 15th round may also be set to the closed state A. Further, the round in which the closed state B (or the closed state A) is set is different depending on whether the lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. It may be a configuration suggesting.

<7th embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from each of the above-described embodiments in that the third operating port 803 is provided in place of the second winning opening portion 404 based on the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54. 54A is a front view of the winning unit 801 and its peripheral configuration according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 54B is a sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 54A. In this figure, the same components as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 54 (a), the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a winning unit 801 in which a variable winning device 802 and a third operating port 803 are integrated. The winning unit 801 includes a base body 811 fitted into the game board 24, and a variable winning device 802 is arranged on the upper part of the base body 811. The variable winning device 802 has a first winning opening portion 403, an opening / closing member 431 that opens and closes the first winning opening portion 403, and a back structure for guiding and detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the first winning opening portion 403 (first). It is composed of a one-ball passage 405 and a winning sensor 403a) for the first large winning opening.

A third operating port 803 is arranged at the lower part of the base body 811 (below the variable winning device 802). The third operating port 803 is opened forward, and its size is such that a plurality of game balls can pass through at the same time. As shown in FIG. 54 (b), a ball passage 821 is provided on the back surface side of the base body 811 so as to communicate with the third operating port 803. The ball passage 821 extends rearward, and the game ball winning the prize in the third operating port 803 is guided backward along the passage bottom surface 821a after flowing into the second ball passage 421. At an intermediate position, a winning sensor 803a for a third operating port that detects a game ball that has won a prize in the third operating port 803 is arranged. The winning sensor 803a for the third operating port is electrically connected to the main control device 81, and the main control device 81 has the third operating port 803 based on the detection information output from the winning sensor 803a for the third operating port. Judge whether or not there is a prize.

When a prize is specified for the third operating port 803 by the main control device 81, each numerical information (big hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter) is specified at the timing when the prize is specified. CS) is acquired and stored as hold information in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit provided in the hold ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114. That is, the third operating port 803, like the lower operating port 34, corresponds to a pattern that is displayed in a variable / stopped manner on the second result display unit BS. In the following, the pattern that is variablely displayed on the second result display unit BS when the lower operating port 34 or the third operating port 803 is won is displayed, and the first result display unit is triggered by the winning of the upper operating port 33. The former may be referred to as a second special figure, and the latter may be referred to as a first special figure in order to distinguish it from a pattern that is variablely displayed in AS.

Further, when a prize is specified for the third operating port 803, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 97, and for example, two prize balls are generated as in the case where a prize is generated for the lower operating port 34. Is paid out.

As shown in FIG. 54 (a), out ports 806 for discharging a part of the game ball that has flowed into the passage portion 408 are provided on the left and right sides of the third operating port 803 in the lower part of the base body 811. There is. The out port 806 is opened forward, and its size is such that one game ball can pass through.

Next, the distribution of the jackpot type according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the distribution table for the upper operating port 33 (first special drawing side), and (b) is for the lower operating port 34 or the third operating port 803 (second special). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table of the figure side).

When the jackpot result is obtained based on the winning of the upper operating port 33, the type of the jackpot result is sorted using the first distribution table shown in FIG. 55 (a). In the first distribution table, a 5R probability variation jackpot result and a 5R normal jackpot result are set as the types of jackpot results. All of these have 5 rounds to be executed.

When the jackpot result is obtained based on the winning of the lower operating port 34 or the third operating port 803, the type of the jackpot result is sorted using the second distribution table shown in FIG. 55 (b). In the second distribution table, a 15R probability variation jackpot result and a 15R normal jackpot result are set as the types of jackpot results. All of these have 15 rounds to be executed.

In this way, the jackpot result based on the winning of the lower operating port 34 or the third operating port 803 is executed in the open / close execution mode rather than the jackpot result based on the winning of the upper operating port 33. The number of rounds to be played tends to increase, and more prize balls are expected. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to receive the lottery on the second special drawing side than to receive the lottery on the first special drawing side.

Incidentally, in the open / close execution mode, the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is configured to be the low frequency support mode regardless of which of the first special figure and the second special figure. Further, during the execution of the open / close execution mode, the variable display of the pattern is not executed for any of the first special figure and the second special figure (see step S301 in FIG. 14).

Here, the data setting process in the present embodiment will be described. This process is performed in step S304 of the game times control process (FIG. 14), and is executed by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81.

In the data setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is "0". When the second start hold storage number RbN is "0", the data setting process for the first result display unit AS is executed, and when the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0", the second result display is performed. The data setting process for the part BS is executed.

In the data setting process for the first result display unit AS, the first start hold storage number RaN of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is decremented by 1, and the first area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit Ra is decremented. Move the stored data to the execution area AE. After that, the process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit to the lower area side is executed.

Further, also in the data setting process for the second result display unit BS, one decrement of the second start hold storage number RbN of the second result display unit hold area Rb and the second result display unit hold area Rb. The data stored in the first area is moved to the execution area AE, and the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit Rb is shifted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the hold information is stored in both the hold area Ra for the first result display unit and the hold area Rb (FIG. 11) for the second result display unit, the second result display is performed. Lottery processing based on the holding information stored in the holding area Rb for the part (holding information stored corresponding to the winning of the lower operating port 34 or the third operating port 803), that is, the lottery processing on the second special drawing side. Is executed with priority.

<About the flow of the game>
Next, the flow of each game in the normal game state and the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. 54. In both the normal game state and the open / close execution mode, refer to FIG. 18 for the flow until the game balls flowing down the left side region PE2 and the right side region PE3 are concentrated in the arrangement area of the variable winning device 301. Since it is the same as the case of the first embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the normal gaming state, the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 802 is not executed, and the opening / closing member 431 is maintained in the closed position where the first winning opening portion 403 is closed (FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b)). In this case, the game ball cannot pass in front of the second opening / closing plate 433 of the opening / closing member 431, and cannot flow into the passage portion 408 below the second opening / closing plate 433. Therefore, no prize is given to the third operating port 803.

By the way, when the opening result is obtained by the electric combination opening lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the through gate 35 (FIG. 4), the electric accessory 34a provided corresponding to the lower operating port 34 is opened. , A game ball can be won in the lower operating port 34. This is the same in both the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode in the support mode, which ensures an opportunity to receive the lottery process on the second special drawing side in the normal gaming state. As already mentioned, the probability of winning a prize in the lower operating port 34 is higher in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode.

On the other hand, when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the variable winning device 802 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and then the switching control (open / close control) from the open state to the closed state is performed at least once. In the switching control, the opening / closing member 431 rotates forward from the closed position, so that the first winning opening 403 is switched from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can be won in the first winning opening 403. Become. At this time, if the game ball is placed on the second opening / closing plate 433 immediately before switching, the game ball falls downward from the second opening / closing plate 433 with the forward rotation of the opening / closing member 431. As a result, the game ball flows into the passage portion 408, and it becomes possible to win a prize in the third operating port 803.

By the way, since the out ports 806 are provided on both the left and right sides of the third operating port 803, it is possible to prevent a part of the inflowing game ball of the passage portion 408 from winning the prize in the third operating port 803. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has flowed into the passage portion 408 from always winning the prize in the third operating port 803, and it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the whereabouts of the game ball that has fallen from the second opening / closing plate 433. Become. The out ports 806 do not necessarily have to be provided on both sides of the third operating port 803, and may be provided on only one side.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A third operating port 803 corresponding to the second special drawing, which is advantageous to the player, is provided so that a prize can be generated in the third operating port 803 in the opening / closing execution mode. In this case, the player not only obtains a large amount of prize balls based on the winning of the variable winning device 802 by shifting the game state to the open / close execution mode, but also obtains a winning / losing lottery on the second special drawing side in the subsequent game. It becomes possible to acquire the right to receive (lottery on the advantageous side). On the other hand, in the normal gaming state, the third operating port 803 is configured so that the winning is not generated, so that it is possible to suppress the game from being performed under conditions that are excessively advantageous to the player. As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to add value to the open / close execution mode and improve the attractiveness of the open / close execution mode while avoiding the influence on the normal gaming state.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is difficult for a prize to be awarded to the operating port on the second special drawing side in a normal gaming state (except when the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode such as during a time reduction or a probability change). It is also effective for the configured gaming machines. That is, in such a gaming machine, the open / close execution mode may be started in a state where the first special figure side has a hold and the second special figure side has no hold, and the open / close execution mode may end in that state. obtain. In this case, even if the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, the winning / fail lottery on the first special figure side (lottery on the disadvantageous side) is first performed in the game after the end of the open / close execution mode. As a result, the player may feel uncomfortable. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, even if the opening / closing execution mode is started in a state where the first special drawing side has a hold and the second special drawing side has no hold, the opening / closing execution mode is being executed. By winning a prize in the third operating port 803, it is possible to supplement the hold on the second special drawing side. As a result, the lottery process on the second special drawing side can be easily performed first, and the playability can be improved.

The third operating port 803 is arranged on the downstream side of the variable winning device 802. For example, if the third operating port 803 is located on the upstream side of the variable winning device 802, the game ball does not reach the variable winning device 802 due to the winning of the third operating port 803, and as a result, the variable winning device There is a risk that winning a prize in 802 will be hindered. In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the third operating port 803 is located on the downstream side of the variable winning device 802, it is possible to prevent the winning of the variable winning device 802 from being hindered by winning the third operating port 803. Will be done. This makes it possible to generate a prize in the third operating port 803 in the open / close execution mode while suppressing the influence of the winning situation of the game ball on the variable winning device 802.

The lower working port 34 is arranged on the upstream side of the variable winning device 802 (second opening / closing plate 433). According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience that the flow of the game ball is restricted by the second opening / closing plate 433 and even the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 34 is restricted. As a result, it is possible to limit the winning situation of the game ball to the lower operating opening 34 from being affected, and to prevent the winning of the third operating opening 803.

In the above embodiment, the game ball cannot be won in the third operating port 803 in the normal gaming state, but it may be possible to win in a range where it is harder to win than in the open / close execution mode. .. As such a configuration, for example, when the distance D1 between the front end portion 433a of the second opening / closing plate 433 and the window panel 62 is set to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball passes in the vicinity of the window panel 62, the third operating port A configuration that allows a prize to be won in 803, or a configuration in which a part of the game ball flowing down the game area PE can be directly led out to the passage portion 408 or the third operating port 803 without going through the second opening / closing plate 433. It is conceivable to do.

<Other embodiments>
The content is not limited to the description of each of the above-described embodiments, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or a part or all of them may be applied in combination.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, a variable winning device of a type that opens and closes the large winning opening by advancing and retreating the shutter in the front-rear direction or rotating the opening / closing member back and forth is exemplified, but it can also be a side-opening type variable winning device. good. The side-opening type variable winning device is provided with a protruding portion that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 24 and has an opening as a ball entry portion, and is provided corresponding to the ball entry portion and intersects the game board 24. It is equipped with a movable blade as a movable body that rotates around the axis of the direction, and the degree of opening of the opening is changed by rotating the movable blade, and an open state (a game ball can enter the ball entry portion). Alternatively, there is a case where the ball is switched between a closed state (a first state in which the ball is easy to enter) and a closed state (a second state in which the game ball cannot enter the ball entering portion or is more difficult to enter than the first state).

(2) The shutter 216 in the first embodiment and the second opening / closing plate 433 in the third embodiment have a symmetrical chevron shape so as to provide a means for guiding the game ball to the out ports 141 and 171. However, it is not limited to this as long as the guidance function is fulfilled. For example, it may be configured to be inclined in only one direction (FIG. 56 (a)), may be configured to be inclined left and right asymmetrically (FIG. 56 (b)), or may be a non-inclined portion such as a trapezoidal shape. It may be a configuration including. In the cases of FIGS. 56 (a) and 56 (b), there is a case where the game ball is made to enter the shutter 216 in the direction of arrow A (for example, when hitting left) and a case where the game ball is made to enter in the direction of arrow B (for example, right). The time required for the game ball on the shutter 216 to reach the out port 171 is different depending on the case of hitting), and it is possible to provide a difference in the degree of advantage.

Further, by making the number, spacing, height, shape, etc. of the convex portions 215 as the deceleration means different on the left and right sides of the shutter 216 and the second opening / closing plate 433, the deceleration degree may be different on the left and right sides.

(3) The shutter 216 in the first embodiment and the second opening / closing plate 433 in the third embodiment are configured to have an inclination downward toward the out ports 141 and 171. Like the second opening / closing plate 433 in the form of the above, it may be in the shape of a flat plate. Further, the second opening / closing plate 433 in the fourth embodiment, the movable plate 651 and the second opening / closing plate 433 in the sixth embodiment, and the shutter portion 732 in the seventh embodiment are flat plates. Like the shutter 216 in the first embodiment, the configuration may have a downward inclination toward the out ports 141 and 171. In this case, it can be configured as shown in FIGS. 56 (a) and 56 (b).

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the out ports 141 and 171 are configured to open toward the variable winning device side, but may be configured to open upward or forward. In particular, in the case of a configuration that opens to the front, it is easier to see how the game ball enters the out opening and flows to the back side when viewed from the front of the game machine, and the game ball is ejected from the game area PE. It is expected that the player will be able to easily recognize.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, in the front portions of the flow path forming portions 131 and 161, the guiding passages that guide the gaming balls that have entered the out openings 141 and 171 and the out openings 141 and 171 to the back side of the gaming board 24. The part that overlaps with is made opaque, and the flow of the game ball that has entered the openings of the out openings 141 and 171 and the out openings 141 and 171 is made invisible or difficult to see from the front of the gaming machine, but the above portion has transparency. However, the openings of the out openings 141 and 171 may be visible or easily visible from the front of the gaming machine.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the hold information is acquired based on the winning of the operating ports 33 and 34, and the hold information is stored up to a predetermined number (4 pieces), respectively. May not be stored. By doing so, the configuration can be simplified. This also applies to winning a prize in the through gate 35.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the hold information based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 is stored up to 4 pieces, but it may be less than 4 pieces or 5 pieces or more. You may. Further, the upper limit storage number of the reserved information based on each prize in the lower operating port 34 and the through gate 35 may be less than 4 or 5 or more. Further, the upper limit storage number of the reserved information based on the winning of each operating port 33, 34 and the through gate 35 may be different.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the game ball is led out to the variable winning device regardless of whether the game ball flows down the left side area PE2 or the right side area PE3 (regardless of the launching force of the game ball). However, only when the game ball flows down either the left side region PE2 or the right side region PE3, it may be configured to lead to the variable winning device.

(9) In the third to seventh embodiments, the convex portion as a deceleration means is provided on the opening / closing member (ball receiving portion), but for example, the front portion of the base body (front surface of the game board 24) may be used. It may be provided in other places. In addition, the game ball is decelerated by creating a step by the convex portion to extend the staying period of the game ball on the opening / closing member, but a non-linear passage shape (for example, a zigzag-shaped passage shape) is used. By doing so, the staying period may be extended.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the "variable ball entry means" includes a variable winning device that is opened and closed when a big hit result is obtained, but the "variable ball entry means" is not limited to this. For example, it may be a variable operating port (electric accessory 34a and lower operating port 34) that is opened and closed based on the result of the electric service opening lottery. This also applies to the "movable body" and the "ball entry portion" opened and closed by the movable body, and the electric accessory 34a and the lower actuating port 34 may correspond to each other. By the way, the operating port opened and closed by the electric accessory 34a does not necessarily have to be on the "lower" side, and its arrangement location is arbitrary.

(11) In the second embodiment, when the variable winning device 301 is in the closed state, a shielding means that faces the out openings 141 and 171 and covers and shields the openings of the out openings 141 and 171 may be provided. good. As a result, the out ports 141 and 171 can be made less noticeable, and their presence can be further diluted. The shielding means may be provided on the opening / closing door 305 (more specifically, it is provided so as to project forward from the front surface portion 305b of the opening / closing door 305). In this case, in conjunction with the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 305, a state in which the shielding means shields the out ports 141 and 171 (a state facing the out ports 141 and 171) and a state in which the shielding means is released (out openings 141 and 111). It is possible to switch between (a state in which it does not face 171).

(12) Out ports 141 and 171 may be omitted in the second embodiment. As a result, it becomes possible to make the variable winning device 301 win all the game balls collected in the arrangement area of the variable winning device 301.

(13) In the third to seventh embodiments, the ball receiving portion (or the ball receiving means) is provided integrally with the opening / closing member (movable body), but these are separated and arranged separately. It may be configured. In this case, a transmission means such as a link mechanism for transmitting the movement of the movable body to the ball receiving portion is provided, and the ball receiving portion is mechanically interlocked with the movable body to switch between a ball receiving state and a falling state in which the game ball is dropped. It may be configured. Further, a ball receiving drive means for driving the ball receiving portion is provided, and the ball receiving driving means is provided so that the ball receiving portion switches from the ball receiving state to the falling state in accordance with the switching of the movable body from the closed state to the open state. It may be configured to control. In the latter case, the control of the ball receiving drive means may be configured by the main control device 81 because the coordination (synchronization) with the control of the movable body is simplified. When the upper variable winning device 502 and the lower variable winning device 503 are provided as in the fifth embodiment, two drive units are provided for the variable winning devices 502 and 503, and one of them is provided. May be used for the drive unit for driving the opening / closing member 431, and the other may be used for the drive unit for driving the ball receiving unit.

(14) In the third embodiment described above, the second winning opening portion 404 is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first winning opening portion 403, but the first winning opening portion 403 is the second winning opening portion. It may be configured to be more advantageous than 404. Further, the first winning opening portion 403 and the second winning opening portion 404 may be configured so that there is no difference in the degree of advantage. In this case, the detection means (sensor) for detecting the winning of the game ball to the first winning opening 403 and the detecting means for detecting the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening 404 are shared and one detection is performed. It may be configured by means. In this case, the detection means may be provided at the confluence of the first ball passage 405 and the second ball passage 421 or on the downstream side thereof.

(15) In the third embodiment, for example, a long-term mode in which a plurality of waiting periods (round interval periods) having different lengths are provided and the waiting period between rounds is relatively long, and relatively It may be configured so that a short-term mode that becomes shorter (shorter than the long-term mode) can be set. When the waiting period is set to the short-term mode, the probability that the next round is started (switched to the open state) before the game ball on the ball receiving portion reaches the out openings 141 and 171 is compared with the case of the long-term mode. Increases, and the probability of winning a game ball to the second winning opening 404 increases. That is, it is possible to make a difference in the ease of winning a prize in the second winning opening portion 404 depending on the length of the waiting period.

As such a configuration, for example, whether or not it is a probabilistic big hit, which operating port wins a big hit (whether it is a big hit in the first special figure or the second special figure), or a big hit. Depending on the game state (whether or not the player is in the high-probability mode, whether or not the player is in the high-frequency support mode, etc.), the waiting period in the open / close execution mode can be long or short. Specifically, for example, in the case of a normal jackpot result, the waiting period of a predetermined round consisting of one or a plurality of rounds shifts to a long-term opening / closing execution mode, while in the case of a probabilistic jackpot result, a predetermined It is conceivable to shift to the open / close execution mode in which the waiting period of the round is a short-term mode. The waiting period setting process can be performed in step S515 of the large winning opening opening / closing process (FIG. 16). Further, also in the fourth to seventh embodiments, a plurality of waiting periods having different lengths may be provided.

(16) In the third embodiment, a general variable winning device (second variable winning device) that does not have a ball receiving portion (or ball receiving means) and a second ball receiving portion in addition to the variable winning device 401. ) May be provided. In this case, if the distribution result of the jackpot type (result of the lottery process based on the winning of the operating ports 33 and 34) is the first result, the process shifts to the opening / closing execution mode for opening and closing the variable winning device 401, and the above If the distribution result is a second result different from the first result, it is preferable to shift to the open / close execution mode for opening / closing the second variable winning device. It is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage for the player depending on which variable winning device is opened and closed, and the interest is improved. The same applies to the fourth to seventh embodiments.

(17) In the third embodiment, the open / close control (control to change the variable winning device from the closed state to the open state and then to the closed state) may be performed a plurality of times in one round game. Compared with the case where the opening / closing control is executed only once, the frequency of winning the game ball in the second winning opening 404 increases, which is preferable in expanding the winning opportunities in the second winning opening 404. In this case, in order to secure the time grace for the game ball to reach the second opening / closing plate 433 during the waiting period between the opening / closing controls (the period in which the variable winning device is closed and the start of the next opening / closing control is waited), the above-mentioned The waiting period may be longer than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball.

Further, a round game in which the opening / closing control can be executed a plurality of times and a round game in which the opening / closing control can be executed only once may be set. In this case, the frequency of winning the second winning opening 404 can be different between the former round game and the latter round game, and in particular, as in the third embodiment, the second winning opening 404 Under a configuration that functions as an advantageous winning opening, the former round game can be more advantageous to the player than the latter round game.

The upper limit of the open period when executing the open / close control multiple times should be shorter than the upper limit of the open period when the open / close control is executed once (in other words, the open / close control is executed multiple times. In this case, it is preferable to execute short-term opening a plurality of times, and to execute one opening / closing control, execute long-term opening). With such a configuration, the number of winning balls to the variable winning device 401 reaches the upper limit at the first opening, even though it is a round game in which opening / closing control can be executed multiple times, and the second time. The occurrence of the situation where the opening of the is not performed is suppressed. In that sense, at least the upper limit of the opening period of the first opening may be shorter than the upper limit of the opening period when the opening / closing control is executed once.

(18) In the third embodiment described above, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 to perform a notification effect (FIGS. 32 (b) and (c)). The notification effect may be a light emission effect using a light emitting means such as an LED, or may be an accessory effect using a decorative movable body (movable accessory) for the movable effect. Further, it does not necessarily have to be visual, and may be, for example, auditory using sound effects. Further, a display device other than the symbol display device 41 may be provided to display the notification effect on the display screen of the display device. The same applies to the introduction effect of FIG. 32 (a) and the end effect of FIG. 32 (d).

(19) In the third embodiment described above, the game state after the end of the open / close execution mode is clearly indicated in the notification effect, but it may be suggested.

(20) In the third embodiment described above, as the specific notification based on the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening portion 404, the notification effect of the lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is performed, but the specific notification is performed. The form of is not limited to this. For example, the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode may be suggested or clearly indicated, or the game ball has won a prize in the second winning opening portion 404, or the number of winnings has reached a predetermined number. Based on this, the effect display such as a background image may be changed, or a special effect image may be displayed.

Further, the first notification is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first winning opening 403, and the second notification different from the first notification is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening 404. May be. When the distance between the two winning openings 403 and 404 is short, it may happen that the player cannot clearly identify which winning opening the game ball has won, but the above configuration has such an inconvenience. Can be suppressed. The notification in this case does not necessarily have to be visual as in the case of (18) above, but may be auditory. Further, the first notification and the second notification may be performed by the same notification means or may be performed by different notification means.

(21) In the third embodiment, when the opening / closing member 431 is switched from the closed state to the open state, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion (second opening / closing plate 433) is the second winning opening portion 404. However, for example, when the player operates an operation means that can be operated by the player such as an effect button, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion is placed in the second winning opening portion 404. It may be configured so that a prize can be won. In addition, the ball entry section where the game ball received by the ball receiving section can enter is configured so that the game ball is not paid out (giving a privilege) when the game ball enters the ball entry section. May be.

(22) In the fourth embodiment, the configuration includes two types of open states including the open state A and the open state B, but the configuration may include three or more types of open states.

(23) In the fourth embodiment, the open state B may be configured to be more advantageous than the open state A (the first winning opening portion 403 is more advantageous than the second winning opening portion 404), and in this case, opening and closing may be performed. The open state on the side where the amount of movement of the member 431 is large can be configured to be more advantageous.

(24) In the modified examples 1 and 2 of the fourth embodiment, the first winning opening portion 403 and the second winning opening portion 403 and the second winning opening portion are in the middle of the period until the variable winning device 401 switches from the open state A to the open state B. Both of the 404s may be in the open state, and the period in which the open state A is set and the period in which the open state B is set may overlap. In this case, the winning mode of the game ball to the first winning opening portion 403 and the second winning opening portion 404 can be complicated as compared with the case where the switching from the open state A to the open state B is performed. The interest is improved. This also applies to the case where the variable winning device 401 switches from the open state B to the open state A. Further, even in a period other than the overlapping period, a state may occur in which both the first winning opening portion 403 and the second winning opening portion 404 are opened.

(25) In the fourth embodiment, when the switching from the closed state to the open state A is started and the switching from the closed state to the open state B is started, predetermined notification is given and predetermined notification is given. The predetermined notification may be configured so as not to suggest or clearly indicate which of the open states A and B will be. In this case, it is possible to entertain the game in which the player is focused on the variable winning device 401 and then predicts which open state will be reached.

(26) In the fourth embodiment, the variable winning drive unit 419 is controlled by the main control device 81, and the opening / closing member 431 is driven by the variable winning drive unit 419, but the variable winning drive unit 419 is omitted. However, the opening / closing member 431 may be rotated by the weight of the game ball in contact with the opening / closing member 431.

(27) In the fourth embodiment, the opening / closing member 431 is configured to rotate, but may be configured to move linearly. As such a configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (c), the first ball entry section 853 and the second ball entry section 854, which are arranged side by side on the left and right and open upward, respectively, and the ball entry sections 853. It is provided with an opening / closing member 855 that is arranged so as to cover the 854 from above and is configured to be able to reciprocate in the arrangement direction of the ball entry portions 835 and 854, and is opened by switching the moving direction of the opening / closing member 855. It is conceivable to switch the state of the ball entry part.

(28) In the sixth embodiment, the configuration includes two types of closed states including the closed state A and the closed state B, but the configuration may include three or more types of closed states.

(29) In the sixth embodiment, the movable plate 651 operates mechanically in conjunction with the movement of the opening / closing member 631, but the movable plate 651 is provided with a driving means for the movable plate to open and close the movable plate 651. It may be configured to be driven and controlled separately from the member 631. In this case, the movable plate driving means may be controlled so as to operate the movable plate 651 in accordance with the start timing of the open / close execution mode and the end timing of the round game (the start timing of the waiting period between rounds). In this case, the control of the movable plate drive means may be performed by the main control device 81 because the coordination (synchronization) with the control of the opening / closing member 631 is simplified.

(30) In the seventh embodiment, the second special figure is more advantageous than the first special figure by providing a difference in the number of rounds executed in the open / close execution mode. Instead or in addition, there is a difference in the degree of advantage depending on whether or not the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, and the number of games in which the high frequency support mode continues is different. It may be configured.

(31) In the seventh embodiment, the number of prize balls when the game ball wins in the third operating port 803 is the same as the number of prize balls when the lower operating port 34 wins, but the third operating opening The number of prize balls when a prize is given to 803 is arbitrary, and may be larger than when a prize is given to the lower operating port 34. In this case, in addition to enhancing the special feeling of the third operating port 803, it is possible to stack more game balls that can be acquired in the opening / closing execution mode, which leads to the improvement of the attractiveness of the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the number of prize balls when the game ball is won in the third operating port 803 may be smaller than that in the case where the lower operating port 34 is won, or the game ball may not be paid out. In this case, it is possible to prevent the total number of prize balls that can be obtained in the open / close execution mode from becoming excessive, and to avoid being too advantageous to the player. In any case, in order to secure the superiority of the variable winning device 802, it is preferable to reduce the number of winning balls to the number of winning balls (15 in the present embodiment) when the variable winning device 802 is won. ..

(32) In the first embodiment, the left side flow path forming portion 131 and the right side flow path forming portion 161 may be configured as shown in FIG. 57. 57 (a) is a front view showing a modified example of each flow path forming portion 131, 161, and (b) is a plan view of (a). Since the right side flow path forming portion 161 has a symmetrical configuration with the left side flow path forming part 131, the left side flow path forming part 131 will be described here as an example.

The left side flow path forming portion 131 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin as in the case of the first embodiment, and is formed on the second vertical wall portion 138 (side surface portion of the left side flow path forming portion 131). , The out port 141 is open. As shown in FIG. 57 (b), the out port 141 has an opening 141a that opens in the lateral direction of the gaming machine (rightward, in the direction of arrow C), and a gaming ball that has entered the opening 141a in the lateral direction of the gaming machine ( It is provided with a guide passage portion 141b that guides the player to the rear of the gaming machine after guiding the player to the left). The portion of the guide passage portion 141b that guides the game ball in the lateral direction of the game machine has a length of at least one game ball.

In this modification, the second vertical wall portion 138 is inclined in a plan view. Specifically, the front end portion 138a of the second vertical wall portion 138 intersects the opening direction diagonally so as to be located on the opening direction side (right side) of the opening portion 141a with respect to the rear end portion 138b. .. Therefore, the opening 141a (opening surface) of the out port 141 is also inclined along the second vertical wall portion 138.

For example, if the second vertical wall portion 138 extends in the front-rear direction (orthogonally to the front surface of the gaming board 24) as in the first embodiment, the front view from the front of the gaming machine is seen. Although it is possible to make the opening of the out port 141 difficult to see, there is a possibility that the opening can be easily seen when looking at it at an angle. In this regard, according to this modification, since the opening 141a is inclined, it becomes difficult to see the opening 141a even when looking diagonally from the front of the gaming machine, and the visibility of the out opening 141 is further improved. Can be reduced.

Further, in this modification, of the front surface portion 131a of the left side flow path forming portion 131, the region 131b (see FIG. 58 (a)) located in front of the opening portion 141a at least in the front view from the front of the gaming machine and the guide. The region 131c located in front of the passage portion 141b is decorated with a predetermined decoration by plating, a seal, or the like, and is colored. On the other hand, the second inclined portion 136, which is the rolling surface of the game ball, does not have such coloring, and the light transmittance of each of the regions 131b and 131c is lower than that of the second inclined portion 136. As a result, the opening 141a and the guide passage portion 141b are suppressed from being seen through the front surface portion 131a, and the out port 141 is less noticeable.

Instead of coloring the regions 131b and 131c, the regions 131b and 131c are formed of an opaque material or a material having a lower light transmittance than the second inclined portion 136 to improve the visibility of the out port 141. It may be configured to lower it. Further, only one of the regions 131b and 131c may be colored or formed of an opaque material. Even in this case, the out port 141 can be made less noticeable than when the light transmittances of both the regions 131b and 131c are high.

Further, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 57B, an overhanging portion 951 is integrally formed at the end portion on the shutter 216 side in the front surface portion 131a of the left flow path forming portion 131. The overhanging portion 951 is located in front of the gaming machine with respect to the opening 141a of the out opening 141, and overhangs the shutter 216 side with respect to the second inclined portion 136 (opening portion 141a). Similar to the regions 131b and 131c, the front surface portion of the overhanging portion 951 is colored (decorated) or formed of an opaque material, so that it is difficult to see through or is not transparent. For this reason, the opening 141a is shielded by the overhanging portion 951 not only when viewed from the front of the gaming machine but also when viewed at an angle, making it difficult to visually recognize the opening 141a. As a result, the visibility of the out port 141 is further lowered, and the out port 141 can be made more inconspicuous.

In the overhanging portion 951, the overhanging portion 951 on the left side flow path forming portion 131 side and the overhanging portion 951 on the right side flow path forming portion 161 side may be continuous in front of the shutter 216. Further, in the above configuration, the overhanging portion 951 is provided after inclining the second vertical wall portion 138, but as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the overhanging portion 951 is provided without inclining the second vertical wall portion 138. May be provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (c), the configuration may be such that only the second vertical wall portion 138 is inclined and the overhanging portion 951 is not provided.

The above configuration shown in FIGS. 57 and 58 can be applied not only to the first embodiment but also to the second to seventh embodiments.

(33) As shown in FIG. 59, a variable winning device 901 that opens and closes the large winning opening 902 by an opening / closing member 911 provided with a ball receiving portion 912 is arranged above the lower operating opening 34 and the electric accessory 34a. May be. In this case, in the situation where the variable winning device 901 is in the open state or the closed state, when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball can be won or easily won from the side to the lower operating port 34, and is electrically operated. When the accessory 34a is closed, the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the lower operating port 34 (FIG. 57 (a)), while the variable winning device 901 is switched from the closed state to the open state. It is preferable that the game ball falls from the ball receiving portion 912 so that the lower operating opening 34 can win a prize from above (FIG. 57 (b)). According to the above configuration, depending on the state of the variable winning device 901, not only the ease of winning a prize in the lower operating port 34 but also the winning mode of the game ball in the lower operating port 34 can be changed. As a result, the variety of games is enhanced and the interest is improved.

(34) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated when a ball enters and becomes a big hit, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. Or, after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as paying out a medal is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

Further, a pachinko machine and a slot machine equipped with a take-in device, in which a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device and then the start lever is operated to start the rotation of the reel. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which and is fused.

<About the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

In addition, the invention described in each of the following features states, "For a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, for example, a gaming ball is based on the entry means provided in the gaming area or the entry of the gaming ball into the entry portion. Regarding the background technique of "It is known to give benefits such as payout of pachinko machines (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-0745)." It was made with the problem that the invention "is rare."

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation, and
A first state (open state) in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the first state. ), And variable ball entry means (variable winning devices 201, 301, 401, 502, 802) that can be switched to.
A variable ball entry control means (main control) that executes variable ball entry control in which the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state based on a predetermined specific opportunity. Function to execute the opening and closing process of the big winning opening by the device 81) and
A privilege giving means (payout control device 97) capable of giving a privilege to a player based on the entry of a game ball into the variable entry means, and
Among the game balls flowing down the game area, the ball did not enter the other entry portions (upper actuating opening 33, lower actuating opening 34, general winning openings 31a to 31d) on the upstream side of the variable entry means. A derivation means (left side flow path forming portion) capable of leading all or substantially all of the game balls to a predetermined region on the downstream side of the other entry portions regardless of the launching force of the game balls in the launch means. The second inclined portion 136 of 131, the second inclined portion 166 of the right side flow path forming portion 161, and the guide structure of the game ball in the regions PE4a to PE4c).
Discharge sections (out ports 141, 171) provided in the game area and capable of discharging the game ball from the game area, and
Equipped with
When the variable ball entry means is in the first state, the gaming ball derived to the predetermined area can enter the variable ball entry means, and the variable ball entry means is in the second state. , A gaming machine characterized in that a gaming ball led out to the predetermined region is configured to be able to enter the discharging portion.

When variable ball entry control is performed, it is desirable for the player to achieve efficient ball entry into the variable ball entry means and suppress unnecessary consumption of the game ball. In this respect, in the above configuration, among the game balls flowing down the game area, all or substantially all of the game balls that did not enter the other entry portions on the upstream side of the variable entry means are entered into other balls. It is configured to be derived to a predetermined area on the downstream side of the unit, and when the variable ball entry means is in the first state, the game ball derived to the predetermined area can enter the variable ball entry means. It has a structure of. In this case, when the player sees the flow of the game balls gathering in the predetermined area and the variable ball entry means is switched to the first state, it is likely that the variable ball entry means can efficiently enter the game balls. It becomes possible to give an impression.

Moreover, regardless of the launching force of the game ball in the launching means, the above-mentioned derivation to the predetermined area is performed, so that the flow of the game ball in which the game ball gathers in the predetermined area is put into a special game state. Not limited to it, it can be generated on a daily basis. That is, when the player constantly watches the above flow, the awareness that the game ball can be efficiently entered into the variable entry means is promoted, and it becomes possible to enhance the enjoyment of generating the variable entry control.

Further, in the above configuration, when the variable ball entry means is in the second state, the game ball led out to the predetermined region can enter the discharge unit. In this case, in a normal game state in which variable ball entry control is not performed, the game balls gathered in the predetermined area can be escaped to the outside of the game area, and the game progresses and the variable ball entry means by the game ball in the predetermined area. It is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the switching operation to the first state is hindered.

Feature A2. A game board (game board 24) in which the game area is formed is provided.
The other entry portions are located on the upstream side of the variable entry means, and all entry portions configured to guide the entered game ball to the back side of the game board (the other entry portions). The gaming machine according to feature A1, which has an upper operating port 33, a lower operating port 34, and general winning openings 31a to 31d).

According to the above configuration, all or substantially all of the launched game balls can be derived to a predetermined area except when the game ball enters a ball entry portion other than the variable ball entry means, and the variable ball entry means can be used. It is possible to preferably realize a configuration in which a game ball can be efficiently inserted into the ball.

Feature A3. The game area is provided with a pattern display means (design display device 41) that is installed so that the game ball can pass on both the left and right sides in the upper direction and in front view, and the pattern is variablely displayed.
The derivation means
A left side lead-out means (second inclined portion 136 of the left side flow path forming portion 131) capable of leading out a game ball flowing down the left side of the left and right sides to the predetermined region.
A right-side lead-out means (second inclined portion 166 of the right-side flow path forming portion 161) capable of leading out a game ball flowing down the right side of the left and right sides to the predetermined region.
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the left side derivation means and the right side derivation means are arranged so as to sandwich the predetermined area.

According to the above configuration, when the game ball is launched so as to flow down the left side region, the game ball can be led out to a predetermined region by the left side derivation means, and the game ball is launched so as to flow down the right side region. If so, the game ball can be derived to a predetermined area by the right side extraction means. That is, it is possible to guide the game ball to a predetermined area regardless of which area the game ball flows down, and it is possible to preferably realize a configuration in which the game ball is led out to the predetermined area regardless of the launching force of the game ball. Further, since the predetermined area is located between the left side derivation means and the right side derivation means, the game ball can be led out to the predetermined area so as to be closer to the central portion in the left-right direction of the game area. As a result, the flow of the game balls gathering in the predetermined area can be constructed in a place easily noticed by the player, and the effect of the feature A1 can be suitably exhibited.

In the feature A3, "arranged so as to sandwich the predetermined area" may be rephrased as "arranged so as to sandwich the predetermined area". Further, it further has the feature that "the left side derivation means and the right side derivation means are configured so that the predetermined area is located in the central portion in the left-right direction of the game area below the pattern display means". May be good.

Feature A4. The gaming machine according to feature A3, wherein the variable ball entry means is arranged between the left side derivation means and the right side derivation means.

According to the above configuration, even if the player does not actually see the flow of the game ball, the game ball is easily gathered in the variable ball entry means due to the positional relationship between the left side lead-out means, the right side lead-out means and the variable ball entry means. It becomes possible to arouse the motivation to play.

Feature A5. The other ball entry sections include predetermined ball entry sections (general winning openings 31a to 31d).
The privilege granting means has a configuration in which a privilege can be granted to a player based on the entry of a game ball into the predetermined entry portion.
In the game area, a first lead-out portion (first inclined portion 133 of the left flow path forming portion 131, right flow path forming portion) capable of leading the game ball above the predetermined entry portion or the predetermined entry portion. The first inclined portion 163) of 161 is provided, and it is provided.
The derivation means is a second derivation unit (left side flow path formation) capable of deriving a game ball that has not entered the predetermined entry unit after being derived by the first derivation unit to the predetermined region. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A4, characterized in that the second inclined portion 136) of the portion 131 and the second inclined portion 166) of the right side flow path forming portion 161 are provided.

For example, if the pachinko ball is configured to enter the ball too efficiently with respect to the variable ball entry means, the processing load inside the gaming machine for entering the ball increases, which may hinder the operation of the gaming machine. In this respect, in this configuration, the game ball is once led out toward the predetermined ball entry section by the first lead-out unit, and the game ball that has not entered the predetermined ball entry section is guided to the predetermined area by the second lead-out section. It is configured. In this case, by increasing the chance that the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry portion, the frequency of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means can be reduced, and the processing load can be reduced. .. At that time, since the privilege is given based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entry section, as a result of the game ball entering the predetermined entry section, the variable entry means may not be entered. However, the player can get the privilege. For this reason, for example, as compared with the case of thinning out the game balls toward the variable ball entry means by guiding the game balls to the discharge portion, it becomes easier for the player to understand and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game motivation. Become.

Feature A6. The feature A5 is characterized in that the case where the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry portion has a lower advantage for the player than the case where the game ball enters the variable ball entry means. Pachinko machine.

According to the above configuration, it is suppressed that it is more advantageous for the player to enter the ball into the predetermined entry portion than to enter the variable entry means, and the enjoyment of entering the game ball into the variable entry means can be enjoyed. It becomes possible to collateralize it suitably.

Feature A7. The gaming machine according to feature A5 or A6, wherein the predetermined ball-entry portion has a configuration in which a gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the variable ball-entry means in the first state.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the game ball heading for the variable ball entry means from being excessively thinned out by the predetermined ball entry portion, and to appropriately secure an opportunity to enjoy the ball entering the variable ball entry means. Become.

The feature A7 is characterized in that "the size of the opening of the predetermined ball entry portion is smaller than the size of the opening of the variable ball entry means in the first state" and "the predetermined entry". It is characterized in that the opening degree of the ball portion is smaller than the opening degree of the variable ball entering means in the first state. "

Feature A8. The derivation means has a flat surface portion (upper surface of the second inclined portion 136, 166) on which the game ball can roll in a passage shape extending along the derivation direction of the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A7, which is characterized by having a configuration that can be derived to a region.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to smoothly derive the game ball toward a predetermined area as compared with the case where the derivation means is configured by the game nail. In addition, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the game ball is not properly derived to a predetermined area due to so-called nail bending, which is a preferable mode for ensuring the fairness of the game.

Feature A9. When the variable ball entry means is in the first state, all or substantially all of the game balls derived to the predetermined area can enter the variable ball entry means. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A8.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to more efficiently enter the game ball into the variable ball entry means. In addition, such entry can be realized regardless of the launching force of the game ball, and it becomes possible to improve the efficiency of entry into the variable entry means regardless of the skill of the player.

Feature A10. The variable ball-entry means forms a predetermined receiving area (accepting area RA) in the gaming area when the second state is switched to the first state, and the game ball flowing into the predetermined receiving area. Is configured to accept
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, wherein the predetermined region is included in the region where the predetermined receiving region is formed.

According to the above configuration, since the predetermined region from which the game ball is derived by the derivation means is included in the region where the predetermined receiving region is formed, when the variable receiving means is in the first state and the receiving region is formed, A game ball is derived in the receiving area. Therefore, all or substantially all of the game balls derived to the predetermined region can be entered into the variable entry means at the timing when the variable entry means is in the first state, and more efficient entry can be realized. Will be possible.

Feature A11. The variable ball entry means includes a shutter (shutter 216) that can be displaced to a predetermined first position (retracted position) and a second position (protruding position) that protrudes in front of the gaming machine from the first position. The features A1 to A10 are configured to be in the first state when the shutter is in the first position and in the second state when the shutter is in the second position. The gaming machine described in either.

According to the above configuration, when the shutter is in the first position, the game ball led out to the predetermined area passes in front of the shutter and can enter the variable ball entry means, while the shutter is in the second position. In the case of, the game ball moves (rolls) on the shutter and then can enter the ejection section, which is a practically preferable mode for distributing the game ball between the variable entry means and the ejection section. be able to.

Feature A12. When the shutter is at least in the second position, the game ball can move on the shutter toward the side of the shutter.
The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein the discharging portion is arranged on the side of the shutter.

According to the above configuration, the game ball can be guided to the discharge portion by using the flow of the game ball on the shutter, and the shutter can also be used as a game ball passage to the discharge portion. As a result, it is possible to cover the derivation of the game ball to the discharge part and the switching of the ease of entering the game ball to the variable ball entry means with one member, and it is possible to reduce the number of parts. ..

Feature A13. The gaming machine according to feature A12, wherein the distance between the shutter and the discharging portion is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the game ball from falling downward from between the shutter and the discharge unit, and it is possible to eliminate the need for a separate lead-out path for guiding the game ball from the shutter to the discharge unit. As a result, the configuration for guiding the gaming ball to the discharging unit becomes simple, and the optimum configuration can be achieved in a gaming machine in which the gaming area is limited.

Feature A14. The gaming machine according to feature A12 or A13, wherein the discharging portion is open to the shutter side.

According to the above configuration, the ball can be smoothly entered into the discharge portion by utilizing the momentum of the game ball moving on the shutter, and it is possible to suppress the flow of the game ball from stagnation on the shutter. Further, since the ball can be directly entered into the discharge portion without changing the moving direction of the game ball, the game ball passage from the shutter to the discharge portion can be easily configured.

Feature A15. Any of the features A12 to A14, wherein the shutter includes a guide portion (first shutter inclined portion 217, second shutter inclined portion 218) capable of guiding the game ball on the shutter to the discharging portion. The game machine described in Crab.

According to the above configuration, the game ball on the shutter can be smoothly guided to the discharge portion, and it is possible to suppress the flow of the game ball on the shutter from being stagnant.

It should be noted that the present feature is "the shutter is provided with an inclined portion (first shutter inclined portion 217, second shutter inclined portion 218) that is inclined downward toward the discharging portion, and the game ball is ejected by the inclined portion. It is characterized by having a structure that can be guided to. "

Feature A16. When the shutter is at least in the second position, the game ball can move on the shutter.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A11 to A14, which comprises a deceleration means (convex portion 215) capable of decelerating a gaming ball moving on the shutter.

According to the above configuration, the staying period of the game ball on the shutter can be extended as compared with the case where there is no deceleration means. As a result, the probability that the shutter switches from the second position to the first position before the game ball crosses the shutter increases, and the probability that the game ball on the shutter enters the variable ball entry means can be increased. .. That is, even a game ball that has reached a predetermined area when the shutter is in the second position can be expected to enter the variable ball entry means, and more efficient entry into the variable ball entry means is achieved. To.

Feature A17. The variable ball entry means has an opening / closing body (opening / closing door 305) that can be displaced to a predetermined first position (retracted position) and a second position (protruding position) protruding in front of the gaming machine from the first position. Prepare,
The opening / closing body can be displaced to the second position by rotating from the first position to the front of the gaming machine.
The variable ball entry means is configured to be in the second state when the opening / closing body is in the first position, and to be in the first state when the opening / closing body is in the second position. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A10.

According to the above configuration, when the opening / closing body is in the first position, the game ball led out to the predetermined area can pass in front of the opening / closing body and enter the discharge portion, while the opening / closing body is the second. When it is in the position, the game ball is picked up by the opening / closing body and can enter the variable ball entry means, which is a practically preferable mode for distributing the game ball into the variable ball entry means and the discharge portion. can.

Feature A18. A game ball can flow down in front of the opening / closing body at the first position.
The gaming machine according to feature A17, wherein the discharging portion is arranged below the opening / closing body.

According to the above configuration, by locating the discharging portion below the opening / closing body, the game ball passing in front of the opening / closing body at the first position can be naturally guided to the discharging portion. This makes it possible to guide the game ball that has reached the predetermined region to the discharge unit with a relatively simple configuration under the situation that the variable ball entry means is in the second state.

In this feature, "the front of the opening / closing body" may be paraphrased as "the front side of the opening / closing body in the front view from the front of the gaming machine". Similarly, in each of the following features, "front" can be appropriately paraphrased as "front side in front view from the front of the gaming machine".

Feature A19. The first discharge part as the discharge part and
A second discharge unit (out ports 141, 171) arranged on the side of the opening / closing body and capable of discharging the game ball from the game area, and
The gaming machine according to the feature A18, which is characterized by the above.

According to the above configuration, when the open / close body is in the second position, the game ball spilled from the open / close body can be discharged from the game area through the second discharge portion, and the game ball can be discharged from the variable ball entry means and its peripheral portion. It is possible to suppress the stagnation of the flow of.

Feature A20. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation, and
A first state (open state) in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the first state. ), And variable ball entry means (variable winning devices 201, 301, 401, 502, 802) that can be switched to.
A variable ball entry control means (main control) that executes variable ball entry control in which the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state based on a predetermined specific opportunity. Function to execute the opening and closing process of the big winning opening by the device 81) and
A privilege giving means (payout control device 97) capable of giving a privilege to a player based on the entry of a game ball into the variable entry means, and
Among the game balls flowing down the game area, the ball did not enter the other entry portions (upper actuating opening 33, lower actuating opening 34, general winning openings 31a to 31d) on the upstream side of the variable entry means. Derivation means (second inclined portion 136 of the left flow path forming portion 131, right flow path forming portion) capable of leading out all or substantially all of the game ball to a predetermined region on the downstream side of the other entry portion. The second inclined portion 166 of 161, the guide structure of the game ball in the regions PE4a to PE4c) and
Discharge sections (out ports 141, 171) provided in the game area and capable of discharging the game ball from the game area, and
Equipped with
When the variable ball entry means is in the first state, the gaming ball derived to the predetermined area can enter the variable ball entry means, and the variable ball entry means is in the second state. , A gaming machine characterized in that a gaming ball led out to the predetermined region is configured to be able to enter the discharging portion.

In the above configuration, among the game balls flowing down the game area, all or substantially all of the game balls that did not enter the other entry portions on the upstream side of the variable entry means are more than the other entry portions. The configuration is such that the ball is led out to a predetermined area on the downstream side, and when the variable ball entry means is in the first state, the game ball derived to the predetermined area can enter the variable ball entry means. It has become. In this case, by allowing the player to see the flow of the game balls in which the game balls gather in a predetermined area, when the variable ball entry means is switched to the first state, the game balls can be efficiently entered into the variable ball entry means. It is possible to give such an impression. Further, in this configuration, when the variable ball entry means is in the second state, the game ball led out to the predetermined region can enter the discharge unit. In this case, in a normal game state in which variable ball entry control is not performed, the game balls gathered in the predetermined area can be escaped to the outside of the game area, and the game progresses and the variable ball entry means by the game ball in the predetermined area. It is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the switching operation to the first state is hindered.

In addition, each configuration described in any one of the above-mentioned features A1 to A19 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

For each configuration of the above features A1 to A20, any of features B1 to B13, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D14, features E1 to E16, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H7. It is possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation, and
A first state (open state) in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the first state. ), And a variable ball entry means (variable winning device 301) that can be switched to
A variable ball entry control means (main control) that executes variable ball entry control in which the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state based on a predetermined specific opportunity. Function to execute the opening and closing process of the big winning opening by the device 81) and
A privilege giving means (payout control device 97) capable of giving a privilege to a player based on the entry of a game ball into the variable entry means, and
A first discharge unit (out port 141, 171) and a second discharge unit (lower out port 321) provided in the game area and capable of discharging the game ball from the game area,
Equipped with
When the variable ball entry means is in the second state, the gaming ball is more likely to enter the second discharge section than the first discharge section, and the variable ball entry means is in the first state. , A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming ball is configured to be easier to enter the first discharging portion than the second discharging portion.

In the above configuration, when the variable ball entry means is in the second state, the game ball is more likely to enter the second discharge section than the first discharge section. Therefore, in the game state in which the variable ball entry control is not executed, the game is played. The ball is easily discharged through the second discharge unit. In the game, the period in which the variable ball entry control is not performed is longer and more likely to be dominant than the period in which the variable ball entry control is performed. Therefore, the awareness that the second discharging unit is the discharging port of the game ball and the game ball entering the second discharging unit becomes the discharging ball (out ball) is promoted. On top of that, when the variable ball entry means is in the first state, the game ball is easily discharged through a first discharge unit other than the second discharge unit. Since there is a prejudice that the second discharge unit is the discharge port, even if the game ball is inserted into the first discharge unit, the player is prevented from recognizing this as the discharge of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to eject the game ball that has not entered the variable ball entry means in the second state while making the ejection inconspicuous. This makes it possible to adjust the degree of entry of the game ball into the variable entry means while suppressing a decrease in the motivation for the game.

Feature B2. When the variable ball entry means is in the first state, the gaming ball is configured to be able to enter the first discharge section and not to enter the second discharge section. The gaming machine described in B1.

According to the above configuration, when the variable ball entry means is in the first state, the game ball is not discharged through the second discharge unit, so that the variable ball entry means is made more difficult to give the impression that the game ball is discharged. It becomes possible to adjust the degree of entry of the game ball into.

Feature B3. When the variable ball entry means is in the second state, the gaming ball is configured to be able to enter the second discharge section and not to enter the first discharge section. The gaming machine according to B1 or B2.

According to the above configuration, when the variable ball entry means is in the second state, the existence of the second ejection portion can be further emphasized, and the game ball enters the second ejection portion and is ejected from the game area. It will be possible to further promote the recognition that it will be done. As a result, the game ball discharged through the first discharging unit can be made less noticeable, and the effect of the feature B1 can be enhanced.

Feature B4. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the first discharging unit has a lower visibility from the front of the gaming machine than the second discharging unit.

According to the above configuration, the presence of the first discharge unit is diluted as compared with the second discharge unit, and it is suppressed that the player's attention to the first discharge unit is increased. As a result, the discharge of the game ball through the first discharge unit becomes less noticeable, and the effect of the feature B1 can be enhanced.

Feature B5. The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the second discharging portion is opened in front of the gaming machine, and the first discharging portion is opened in a direction different from that in front of the gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, it can be a practically preferable embodiment in embodying the configuration of the above feature B4. That is, by increasing the visibility of the second discharging portion from the front of the gaming machine, the existence of the second discharging portion can be suitably appealed to the player, while the first discharging portion is from the front of the gaming machine. It is possible to reduce the visibility of the slingshot and make it less noticeable.

In this feature, "a game board (game board 24) in which the game area is formed on the front surface thereof" is provided, and "a direction different from the front of the game machine" is set to "a direction along the front surface of the game board". Or "direction parallel to the front surface of the game board".

Feature B6. Each of the discharge portions has an opening through which a game ball can pass.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, wherein the opening of the first discharging portion is smaller than the opening of the second discharging portion.

According to the above configuration, the opening of the first discharge portion can be made less noticeable than the opening of the second discharge portion, and the player can be less likely to notice the existence of the first discharge portion. Even if the player notices the existence of the first discharge portion, the small opening suppresses the impression that the game ball is easy to enter. As a result, it is possible to reduce the anxiety of the player who is concerned about the existence of the first discharging unit, and to suitably suppress the decrease in the motivation for playing.

In this feature, the "opening" may be paraphrased as the "opening width". Further, in this feature, "each of the discharging portions is an opening through which a game ball can pass" may be rephrased as "each of the discharging portions is an opening through which a game ball flowing down the game area can pass".

Feature B7. Described in Feature B6, wherein a plurality of game balls can pass through the opening of the second discharge portion, and one game ball can pass through the opening of the first discharge portion. Gaming machine.

In the above configuration, since a plurality of game balls can enter the second ejection unit at the same time, the game balls in the game area can be smoothly entered in a normal game state in which the variable entry control is not performed. It is possible to suppress the stagnation of the game ball in the game area. On the other hand, by keeping the opening of the first discharge portion to the minimum size that can accept the game ball, the discharge of the game ball is made inconspicuous, but the game ball does not enter the variable ball entry means. Can be discharged as appropriate.

Feature B8. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, wherein the first discharging unit is arranged on the upstream side of the second discharging unit.

In a gaming machine, the discharging portion is often arranged at the bottom (downstream portion) of the gaming area, and it is assumed that there are many cases where the player plays with such a prejudice. This feature utilizes this, and the first discharge unit that functions when the variable ball entry means is in the first state is arranged on the upstream side of the second discharge unit that functions in the normal gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from declining the motivation to play the game by recognizing the first discharge unit as a discharge port at first glance.

Feature B9. The variable ball entry means
The designated entry section (large winning opening 302) and
An opening / closing body (opening / closing door 305) that can open / close the predetermined ball entry portion,
Equipped with
By rotating the opening / closing body forward from the predetermined first position (evacuation position), the opening / closing body can be displaced to a second position (protruding position) protruding forward from the first position. Cage,
The variable ball entry means is configured to be in the second state when the opening / closing body is in the first position, and to be in the first state when the opening / closing body is in the second position.
A game ball can flow down in front of the opening / closing body at the first position.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, wherein the first discharging unit is arranged on the side of the opening / closing body.

In the above configuration, when the opening / closing body is in the second position, the game ball received by the opening / closing body moves along the opening / closing body, so that the game ball can be guided to the first discharge portion side. When the opening / closing body is in the first position, the game ball may pass in front of the opening / closing body so that the opening / closing body is not guided to the first discharging portion side. That is, the game ball can be distributed to the first discharge unit and the second discharge unit along with the execution of the variable ball entry control, and the configuration of the above-mentioned feature B1 can be realized by a relatively simple configuration. ..

Feature B10. The gaming machine according to feature B9, wherein the first discharging unit is arranged adjacent to the opening / closing body.

According to the above configuration, since the first discharging portion and the opening / closing body are adjacent to each other, when the opening / closing body is in the second position and the game ball moving on the opening / closing body passes through the opening / closing body, the said The game ball can be quickly entered into the first discharging unit. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the flow of the game ball from passing through the opening / closing body to the first discharge portion, and the entry of the game ball into the first discharge portion becomes more inconspicuous. Further, by adjoining the first discharging portion and the opening / closing body, the distance between the first discharging portion and the predetermined ball entry portion can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to make the ball enter the first discharge portion while making it appear as if the ball has entered the predetermined entry portion, and it becomes possible to make the discharge less noticeable.

In this feature, "arranged adjacent to the opening / closing body" may be rephrased as "arranged adjacent to the opening / closing body in front view from the front of the gaming machine".

Feature B11. The gaming machine according to feature B9 or B10, wherein the distance between the first discharging portion and the opening / closing body is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

For example, if the game ball falls from between the first discharging unit and the opening / closing body, the player can visually recognize how the game ball spills from the opening / closing body, and as a result, the game ball tends to have an impression of spilling. There is a risk. In this respect, in this configuration, since the game ball is prevented from falling between the first discharging portion and the opening / closing body, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to give the impression that the game ball is likely to spill, and the player is motivated to play the game. Can be suitably suppressed.

Feature B12. The opening / closing body includes a ball receiving portion (rear surface portion 305c of the opening / closing door 305) capable of receiving a game ball flowing down the game area when the opening / closing body is in the second position.
One of the features B9 to B11, which comprises an obstructing means (projection portion 325) capable of obstructing the flow of the game ball on the ball receiving portion to the first discharging portion side. The described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, for example, by adjusting the degree of inhibition by the obstructing means at the time of designing the gaming machine, it is possible to adjust the ease of entering the gaming ball into the first discharging unit, and by extension, It becomes possible to adjust the ease of entering a game ball into a variable ball entry means (predetermined entry portion).

In this feature, "inhibiting means capable of inhibiting the flow of the game ball on the ball receiving portion to the first discharging portion side" is referred to as "the first of the gaming balls on the ball receiving portion". "Adjusting means that can adjust the ease of movement to the discharging part" and "Distributing means that can distribute the game ball on the ball receiving part to the first discharging part side and the predetermined ball receiving part side" It may be paraphrased as.

Feature B13. The gaming machine according to any one of features B9 to B12, wherein the second discharging portion is arranged below the opening / closing body.

According to the above configuration, by locating the second discharging portion below the opening / closing body, the game ball passing in front of the opening / closing body at the first position can be naturally guided to the second discharging portion. As a result, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the game ball can easily enter the second ejection unit when the variable ball entry means is in the second state, with a relatively simple configuration.

For each configuration of the features B1 to B13, any of features A1 to A20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D14, features E1 to E16, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H7. It is possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic C group>
Features C1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation, and
A first entry section (first winning opening section 403) and a second entry section (second winning opening section 404) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball,
The first state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter the first ball entry portion, and the game ball can enter the first ball entry portion or enters the ball more than the first state. A movable body (opening / closing member 431) that can be easily switched to the second state (open state),
A switching control means (opening / closing of a large winning opening by the main control device 81) for executing switching control for changing the movable body from the first state to the second state and then changing to the first state based on a predetermined opportunity. Function to execute processing) and
A privilege granting means (payout control device 97) capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the entry of a game ball into each entry portion of the first entry portion and the second entry portion.
Equipped with
A ball receiving portion (second opening / closing plate 433) capable of receiving a game ball flowing down the game area is provided in a situation where the movable body is at least in the first state.
When the movable body switches from the first state to the second state, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion is configured to be able to enter the second entering portion. A gaming machine.

When the switching control is performed, it is desirable for the player to achieve efficient entry into the first ball entry section and suppress unnecessary consumption of the game ball. For this reason, depending on the player, a so-called stop hit may be performed, such as refraining from launching the game ball at a timing at which it is difficult for the ball to enter the first ball entry portion. However, excessive technical intervention is not desirable because it impairs the fairness of the game.

In this respect, in the above configuration, a ball receiving portion capable of receiving a game ball on the game area is provided in the first state where the ball cannot be entered or is difficult to enter, and the first state is provided. Based on the switch to the second state where the ball can enter the first ball entry section or is easy to enter, the game ball received by the ball receiving section can enter the second ball entry section. There is. In this case, even a game ball launched at a timing at which the first ball entry portion is unlikely to enter can be entered into the second entry section via the ball receiving portion. As a result, it becomes possible to efficiently obtain the privilege while suppressing the generation of waste balls, and the configuration can be configured to meet the needs of the player. Not only that, it is also possible to suppress the rampant strikes, which is advantageous in ensuring the fairness of the game.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion can enter the second entry portion instead of the first entry portion. For example, if the game ball received by the ball receiving portion is configured to enter the first ball receiving portion, the ball enters due to the movable body being in the first state (not via the ball receiving portion). Since the entry destination of the game ball is the same as that of the ball entering in (when entering the ball in), it may be difficult for the gaming machine to identify which route the ball entered. In this respect, in this configuration, since the entry destination of the game ball is different depending on whether the ball is entered through the ball receiving portion or without the ball receiving portion, the ball is entered by any route in the gaming machine. Can be easily identified. For this reason, for example, it becomes easy to differentiate between the former case and the latter case by providing a difference in the degree of advantage, which is advantageous in evoking a special feeling for entering the ball through the ball receiving portion. Can be. Further, for example, in the configuration in which the game ball received by the ball receiving portion is inserted into the first entry portion (the entry portion opened and closed by the movable body), the game ball heading toward the first entry portion through the ball receiving portion and the game ball. There is a concern that the game balls heading directly to the first ball entry section will interfere with each other without passing through the ball receiving section, and each ball entry will be hindered. In this respect, in the present configuration, the occurrence of such an inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by separating the ball-entry portion via the ball receiving portion and the ball-entry portion not intervening.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the movable body is configured not to allow the gaming ball to enter the second entry portion when the movable body is in the first state.

According to the above configuration, a game in which a game ball is placed (or stored) on the movable body while the movable body is in the first state, and the game ball is released toward the second ball entry portion when switching to the second state. Can be established, and it will be possible to provide unprecedented novel playability. This gives the player a fresh impression and makes it possible to suitably increase the motivation to play.

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, wherein the movable body has a configuration that does not allow the gaming ball to enter the second entry portion when the movable body is in the second state.

According to the above configuration, when the ball can enter the first ball entry portion or is in the second state where it is easy to enter the ball, the player does not enter the second ball entry portion. It is possible to concentrate on whether or not the ball enters the first ball entry section without worrying about the ball entry section. That is, it is possible to add a new game in which the game ball is inserted into the second entry portion while suppressing the influence of the original game of the switching control for switching the movable body between the first state and the second state. It will be possible. When this feature is applied to feature C2, the opportunity for the game ball to enter the second entry section can be limited when switching from the first state to the second state, and the second entry section can be reached. It is advantageous in increasing the joy and surprise when a ball enters.

Feature C4. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, characterized in that the movable body is configured to allow the gaming ball to enter the second entry portion when the movable body is in the second state.

According to the above configuration, when the movable body is in the second state, it is possible to enjoy whether the game ball enters not only the first entry portion but also the second entry portion. In other words, it is possible to give fun to which entry part the game ball enters, and it is more interesting than a uniform game in which only one entry section contains the game ball. It will be possible to make it.

Feature C5. When the movable body switches from the first state to the second state, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion is configured to drop downward.
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein the dropped gaming ball can enter the second entry portion.

According to the above configuration, by switching from the first state to the second state, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion enters the second entering portion and the ball receiving state in the ball receiving portion is reset. Can be planned. As a result, when the movable body is returned to the first state, it becomes possible to start a new ball receiving with no game ball remaining on the ball receiving portion.

Feature C6. The gaming machine according to feature C5, wherein the second ball entry portion is arranged below the ball receiving portion and is open upward.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to make it easier for a game ball that has fallen from a ball receiving portion to enter the second entry portion. Moreover, the passage of the game ball from the ball receiving portion to the second entry portion can be simplified, and the occupied area of the passage in the game area can be suppressed to be smaller than in the case where the passage is complicated. Become. That is, it is possible to make an optimum configuration in a gaming machine having a limited gaming area.

Feature C7. The movable body is rotatable in a predetermined direction (front-back direction of the game), and is characterized in that the rotation causes the switching from the first state to the second state. Or the gaming machine according to C6.

According to the above configuration, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion can be dropped by using the rotation of the movable body, and the configuration of the above features C5 or C6 can be realized by a relatively simple configuration. Become.

Feature C8. The movable body includes an opening / closing portion (first opening / closing plate 432) capable of opening / closing the first ball entry portion.
Described in feature C7, the ball receiving portion is configured to project forward of the gaming machine from the opening / closing portion when the first ball entering portion is in the first state by the opening / closing portion. Pachinko machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to receive the game ball in the ball receiving portion while restricting the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry portion by the opening / closing portion. As a result, for example, the game ball bounces off due to contact with the ball receiving portion, and it is possible to suitably suppress the inconvenience of entering the first ball entry portion even though it is in the first state.

Feature C9. The movable body is configured to switch from the first state to the second state by the rotation to the front of the gaming machine.
A predetermined game component (window panel 62) is arranged in front of the movable body at a distance from the movable body.
The movable body includes an opening / closing portion (first opening / closing plate 432) capable of opening / closing the first ball entry portion, and the opening / closing portion causes the first ball entry portion to be in the second state. The gaming machine according to feature C7 or C8, wherein the distance (distance D2) between the end of the opening / closing portion on the gaming component side and the gaming component is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the above configuration, when the first ball entry portion is in the second state by the opening / closing portion, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing in front of the opening / closing portion and moving below the movable body. That is, when the ball can enter the first ball entry portion or is in the second state where it is easy to enter the ball, the ball does not enter the second entry section, and the player cares about the second entry section. It is possible to concentrate on whether or not a ball enters the first ball entry portion without doing so. That is, it is possible to add a new game in which the game ball is inserted into the second entry portion while suppressing the influence of the original game of the switching control for switching the movable body between the first state and the second state. It will be possible.

Feature C10. The movable body is configured to switch from the first state to the second state by the rotation to the front of the gaming machine.
A predetermined game component (window panel 62) is arranged in front of the movable body at a distance from the movable body.
The movable body includes an opening / closing portion (first opening / closing plate 432) capable of opening / closing the first ball entry portion, and the opening / closing portion causes the first ball entry portion to be in the second state. The gaming machine according to feature C7 or C8, wherein the distance (distance D2) between the end portion of the opening / closing portion on the gaming component side and the gaming component is configured to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the above configuration, when the first ball entry portion is in the second state by the opening / closing portion, the game ball can pass in front of the opening / closing portion and move below the movable body. That is, in the second state where it is possible or easy to enter the first ball entry section, the ball can enter the second entry section, and the game ball can enter either entry section. It is possible to give the fun of whether or not the ball enters. As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game as compared with a uniform game in which only one game ball is inserted or not.

Feature C11. Discharge sections (out ports 141, 171) provided in the game area and capable of discharging the game ball from the game area, and
The features C1 to C10 are provided with a take-out means (upper surface portion 433b of the second opening / closing plate 433) capable of leading the gaming ball received by the ball receiving portion to the discharging portion side. The gaming machine described in either.

According to the above configuration, when the switching control is not executed and the movable body is normalized to the first state, that is, when the ball receiving portion continues to be in the ball receiving state for a long period of time, the ball receiving portion receives the ball receiving portion. The game ball can be guided to the discharge unit and appropriately discharged from the game area. As a result, the game ball is suppressed from staying on the ball receiving portion, and the ball clogging in the ball receiving portion and its peripheral region is suppressed. For example, if ball jams occur frequently in these areas, the chances of having the game field employees clear the ball jams increase, which makes the player feel annoyed or builds a flow of game balls contrary to the design intention. Although there are concerns about inconvenience, according to this configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience.

Feature C12. The derivation means can derive the game ball received by the ball receiving portion toward the side of the ball receiving portion.
The gaming machine according to feature C11, wherein the discharging portion is arranged adjacent to the ball receiving portion on the side of the ball receiving portion.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to facilitate the derivation of the game ball from the ball receiving portion to the discharging portion. In addition, since the distance between the ball receiving part and the discharging part becomes short, it is visually confirmed whether the game ball remains on the ball receiving part or whether the ball has already entered the discharging part without moving the line of sight. It is possible to consolidate the points of interest. As a result, it is possible to suppress the distraction of attention as compared with the case where it is necessary to visually recognize various parts, and it is possible to make the configuration so that the player can easily concentrate on the game.

Feature C13. The gaming machine according to feature C12, wherein the discharging portion is open to the ball receiving portion side.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to smoothly enter the ejection part by using the momentum of the game ball moving on the ball receiving part, and it is possible to suppress the flow of the game ball from stagnation on the ball receiving part. become. Further, since the ball can be directly entered into the discharge portion without changing the moving direction of the game ball, the structure for deriving the game ball to the discharge portion can be simplified.

Feature C14. When the movable body is in the first state, the game ball can move on the ball receiving portion.
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C13, which comprises a deceleration means (convex portion 215) capable of decelerating a gaming ball moving on the ball receiving portion.

According to the above configuration, the staying period of the game ball on the ball receiving portion can be extended as compared with the case where there is no deceleration means, and the first state to the second state before the game ball passes through the ball receiving portion. The probability that a switch to will be implemented can be increased. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball received by the ball receiving portion to enter the second ball entering portion, and it is possible to appropriately arouse the motivation for playing.

Feature C15. Means for differentiating the degree of advantage for the player between the case where the game ball enters the first ball entry section and the case where the game ball enters the second ball entry section (the effect control device 82 executes the notification effect control process). The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C14, which is characterized by having a function of performing the game.

According to the above configuration, it is not only a game in which a game ball is entered into a first entry section or a second entry section to avoid ejection of the game ball, but also a first entry section and a second entry section. The value can be different depending on which one the game ball enters. For this reason, which entry portion the game ball enters is of great concern to the player, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C16. Means for making it more advantageous for the player when the game ball enters the second ball entry section than when the game ball enters the first ball entry section (notification effect control process by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C15, which is characterized by having a function of executing the above.

According to the above configuration, when the game ball enters the second entry section, it is more advantageous than the case where the game ball enters the first entry section, so that the entry into the second entry section is realized. You can increase the joy of doing so. As a result, it is possible to significantly increase the interest in which entry portion the game ball enters, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C17. The privilege granting means
A first privilege granting means capable of granting a first privilege (payout of a predetermined number of game balls) to a player based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry portion.
A second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion (combination of payout of a predetermined number of game balls and a notification effect, more than the predetermined number). 2nd privilege granting means that can grant)
The gaming machine according to the feature C16, which is characterized in that it is provided with.

According to the above configuration, when a game ball enters the second entry section, a second benefit that is more advantageous than the first benefit granted based on the entry into the first entry section is granted. Therefore, it is possible to increase the joy when the ball enters the second ball entry portion. As a result, it is possible to significantly increase the interest in which entry portion the game ball enters, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

If the configuration of the feature C2 or C3 is applied to the feature C16 or C17, the opportunity to enter the second ball entry portion is limited, which is effective in enlivening the game.

Feature C18. A game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for transitioning to a special gaming state in which the switching control can be executed a plurality of times under a predetermined condition (resulting in a big hit). The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C17, characterized in that it is provided.

According to the above configuration, the game ball received by the ball receiving unit during the waiting period (the period of waiting for the start of the next switching control with the first ball entering unit in the first state) that occurs between the front and rear switching controls. Can be entered into the second entry portion. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the generation of wasted balls in a special gaming state and efficiently obtaining benefits.

Feature C19. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation, and
A first entry section (first winning opening section 403) and a second entry section (second winning opening section 404) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball,
The first state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter the first ball entry portion, and the game ball can enter the first ball entry portion or enters the ball more than the first state. A movable body (opening / closing member 431) that can be easily switched to the second state (open state),
A switching control means (opening / closing of a large winning opening by the main control device 81) for executing switching control for changing the movable body from the first state to the second state and then changing to the first state based on a predetermined opportunity. Function to execute processing) and
A privilege granting means (payout control device 97) capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the entry of a game ball into the first entry unit, and
Equipped with
A ball receiving portion (second opening / closing plate 433) capable of receiving a game ball flowing down the game area is provided in a situation where the movable body is at least in the first state.
A gaming machine characterized in that a gaming ball received by the ball receiving portion is configured to be able to enter the second entering portion under a predetermined condition.

When the switching control is performed, it is desirable for the player to achieve efficient entry into the first ball entry section and suppress unnecessary consumption of the game ball. For this reason, depending on the player, a so-called stop hit may be performed, such as refraining from launching the game ball at a timing at which it is difficult for the ball to enter the first ball entry portion. However, excessive technical intervention is not desirable because it impairs the fairness of the game.

In this respect, in the above configuration, the ball receiving portion is provided so that the ball receiving portion can receive the game ball on the game area in the first state where the ball cannot be entered or is difficult to enter in the first ball receiving portion. The game ball received by the player can enter the second ball entry section. In this case, even a game ball launched at a timing at which the first ball entry portion is unlikely to enter can be entered into the second entry section via the ball receiving portion. As a result, it becomes possible to efficiently obtain the privilege while suppressing the generation of waste balls, and the configuration can be configured to meet the needs of the player. Not only that, it is also possible to suppress the rampant strikes, which is advantageous in ensuring the fairness of the game.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion can enter the second entry portion instead of the first entry portion. For example, if the game ball received by the ball receiving portion is configured to enter the first ball receiving portion, the ball enters due to the movable body being in the first state (not via the ball receiving portion). Since the entry destination of the game ball is the same as that of the ball entering in (when entering the ball in), it may be difficult for the gaming machine to identify which route the ball entered. In this respect, in this configuration, since the entry destination of the game ball is different depending on whether the ball is entered through the ball receiving portion or without the ball receiving portion, the ball is entered by any route in the gaming machine. Can be easily identified. For this reason, for example, it becomes easy to differentiate between the former case and the latter case by providing a difference in the degree of advantage, which is advantageous in evoking a special feeling for entering the ball through the ball receiving portion. Can be. Further, for example, in a configuration in which a game ball received by a ball receiving portion is inserted into a first entry portion (an entry portion opened and closed by a movable body), a game ball heading toward the first entry portion through the ball receiving portion and a game ball. There is a concern that the game balls heading directly to the first ball receiving part will interfere with each other without going through the ball receiving part, and each ball will be hindered. By separating from the ball entry portion, the occurrence of such inconvenience is suitably suppressed.

In addition, each configuration described in any one of the above-mentioned features C1 to C18 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

For each configuration of the above features C1 to C19, any of features A1 to A20, features B1 to B13, features D1 to D14, features E1 to E16, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H7. It is possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic D group>
Feature D1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation, and
A ball entry section (large winning opening 202, large winning opening 302, second winning opening section 404) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball.
A privilege granting means (payout control device 97) capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
Discharge sections (out ports 141, 171) provided in the game area and capable of discharging the game ball from the game area, and
Equipped with
The discharging portion is configured to open in the lateral direction of the gaming machine when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

In the above configuration, since the discharging portion is opened in the lateral direction of the gaming machine, it is difficult to visually recognize the opening of the discharging portion not only when viewed from the front of the gaming machine but also when looking down from the front of the gaming machine. Can be done. This makes it possible to eject the game ball from the game area while making the discharge of the game ball inconspicuous.

Feature D2. A game board (game board 24) in which the game area is formed on the front surface thereof,
Protruding portions (left side flow path forming portion 131, right side flow path forming portion 161) protruding in front of the gaming machine from the front surface of the gaming board, and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the discharging portion is provided in the protruding portion so as to open in the lateral direction of the gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, since the discharging portion is formed so as to open in the lateral direction of the gaming machine in front of the front surface of the gaming board, the front surface (gaming area) of the gaming board is formed while making the discharging portion inconspicuous. The flowing game ball can be satisfactorily received into the discharge portion, and it can be a practically preferable embodiment in realizing the configuration of the above-mentioned feature D1.

Feature D3. The discharge portion is configured to open at a side surface portion (second vertical wall portion 138, 168) of the protrusion.
The protruding portion is arranged in front of the gaming machine from the opening of the discharging portion, and projects from the side surface portion in the opening direction of the opening when viewed from above the gaming machine (overhanging portion 951). The gaming machine according to feature D2, characterized in that the machine is provided with.

In the above configuration, since the pachinko machine is arranged in front of the opening of the discharging portion and the overhanging means is provided so as to project in the opening direction from the opening, the pachinko machine is not only viewed from the front but also diagonally. Even when viewed in the above, the opening can be shielded by the overhanging means, making it difficult to see the opening. As a result, the visibility of the discharging portion is further lowered, and the discharging portion can be made more inconspicuous.

Feature D4. The discharge portion is configured to open at a side surface portion (second vertical wall portion 138, 168) of the protrusion.
The side surface portion is characterized in that the end portion on the front side of the gaming machine is inclined with respect to the opening direction so that the end portion on the front side of the gaming machine is located on the opening direction side of the opening portion with respect to the end portion on the back surface side of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to the feature D2 or D3.

According to the above configuration, since the side surface portion on which the opening is formed is inclined, it becomes difficult to see the opening not only from the front view from the front of the gaming machine but also when looking at it at an angle, and the pachinko machine is discharged. The visibility of the portion can be further reduced.

Feature D5. The protruding portion is provided with a first region (second inclined portion 136) having a relatively high light transmittance and a second region having a relatively low light transmittance.
The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D4, wherein the second region includes at least a region (region 131b) on the front side of the gaming machine at the opening of the discharging portion.

In the above configuration, a first region having a high light transmittance is provided in the protruding portion, and for example, by providing a light emitting means behind the protruding portion, a light emitting effect such as illuminating the first region brightly is performed. It is possible to improve the appearance of the protrusion. However, in this case, the opening of the discharge portion becomes visible through the protruding portion, which is not desirable in order to make the discharge portion inconspicuous. In this respect, in this configuration, a second region having a low light transmittance is provided, and the second region includes at least a region on the front side of the gaming machine of the opening of the discharging portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the opening from being seen through when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and the discharging portion can be made less noticeable.

It is particularly beneficial when this feature is applied to the feature D4. That is, in the configuration in which the opening is inclined as in the above feature D4, the projected area of the opening tends to be large in the front view from the front of the gaming machine. Therefore, if the structure is such that the opening can be seen through the protruding portion, the opening is easily conspicuous, and the player can easily notice the existence of the discharging portion. By applying this feature to such a configuration, it is possible to make the opening difficult to see, and it is possible to suitably suppress the discharge portion (opening) from being conspicuous.

Feature D6. The discharge portion is configured to open at the side surface portion (second vertical wall portion 138, 168) of the protrusion.
The discharge unit includes a guide passage unit (guide passage unit 141b) that guides the game ball that has entered the opening in the lateral direction of the gaming machine.
The protruding portion is provided with a first region (second inclined portion 136) having a relatively high light transmittance and a second region having a relatively low light transmittance.
The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D5, wherein the second region includes at least a region (region 131c) on the front side of the gaming machine in the guide passage portion.

In the above configuration, a first region having a high light transmittance is provided in the protruding portion, and for example, by providing a light emitting means behind the protruding portion, a light emitting effect such as illuminating the first region brightly is performed. It is possible to improve the appearance of the protrusion. However, in this case, the guide passage portion and the game ball moving in the passage portion can be seen through the protruding portion, which is not desirable in order to make the discharge portion inconspicuous. In this respect, in this configuration, a second region having a low light transmittance is provided, and the second region includes at least a region located in front of the guide passage. As a result, it is possible to prevent the guide passage portion and the game ball moving in the passage portion from being seen through when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and the discharge portion can be made less noticeable.

When this feature is applied to the feature D5, the "first region" and the "second region" can be paraphrased as "the first region" and "the second region", respectively.

Feature D7. The ball entry section and the ejection section each have an opening through which a game ball can pass.
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, wherein the discharge portion has a smaller opening than the ball entry portion.

According to the above configuration, the discharging portion can be made less noticeable than the ball entry portion, and the player can be less likely to notice the presence of the discharging portion.

In this feature, the "opening" may be paraphrased as the "opening width". Further, in the present feature, "the entrance portion and the discharge portion are openings through which a game ball can pass", and "the entry portion and the discharge portion are openings through which a game ball flowing down the game area can pass". It may be paraphrased.

Feature D8. The first state (open state) in which the game ball can or is easy to enter the ball entry portion, and the second state in which the game ball cannot enter the ball entry portion or is harder to enter than the first state. (Closed state), movable body (shutter 216, opening / closing door 305, second opening / closing plate 433) that can be switched to
A switching control means (opening / closing of a large winning opening by the main control device 81) for executing switching control for changing the movable body from the second state to the first state and then changing to the second state based on a predetermined opportunity. Function to execute processing) and
The discharge unit is described in any one of the features D1 to D7, which is arranged on the side of the movable body in a front view from the front of the gaming machine and is configured to open to the movable body side. Gaming machine.

In the above configuration, since the discharging portion is arranged on the side of the movable body and the discharging portion opens on the movable body side, not only when viewed from the front of the gaming machine but also when looking down from the front of the gaming machine. The visibility of the discharge portion can be reduced. Further, in the above configuration, since the game ball can be smoothly entered into the discharge portion by using the momentum of the game ball flowing toward the side of the movable body, the flow of the game ball flows around the discharge portion. It is suppressed from being conspicuous due to stagnation or clogging of the ball. From the above, it becomes possible to discharge the game ball from the game area while making the discharge of the game ball inconspicuous.

Feature D9. The movable body has a configuration that can be displaced to a predetermined first position (retracted position) and a second position (protruding position) that protrudes in front of the gaming machine from the first position, and is in the second position. In some cases, it is possible to receive a game ball flowing down the game area.
The feature D8 is provided with a lead-out means (first shutter tilting portion 217, second shutter tilting portion 218) capable of leading the gaming ball received by the movable body to the discharging portion side. The described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the game ball is suppressed from staying on the movable body, and the ball clogging in the movable body and the peripheral region thereof is suppressed. For example, if ball jams occur frequently in these areas, the chances of having the game field employees clear the ball jams increase, which makes the player feel annoyed or builds a flow of game balls contrary to the design intention. Although there are concerns about inconvenience, according to this configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience.

Feature D10. The game according to feature D9, wherein the movable body is configured to be in the first state when it is in the first position and to be in the second state when it is in the second position. Machine.

According to the above configuration, when the switching control is not executed and the movable body is normalized to the first state, that is, when the movable body is kept in the ball receiving state for a long period of time, the game ball received by the movable body. Can be guided to the discharge unit and appropriately discharged from the game area.

Feature D11. The game according to feature D9, wherein the movable body is configured to be in the second state when it is in the first position and to be in the first state when it is in the second position. Machine.

According to the above configuration, the game ball that did not enter the ball entry section is guided to the discharge section under the condition of the first state (the state where the ball can enter the ball entry section or is easy to enter), and the game ball is guided from the game area to the discharge section. It can be discharged as appropriate. In this case, since the discharge portion is less noticeable, it is possible to discharge the game ball that did not enter the ball entry portion while suppressing the emphasis on the discharge. This makes it possible to adjust the degree of entry of the game ball into the entry portion while suppressing a decrease in the motivation for the game.

Feature D12. The gaming machine according to any one of features D8 to D11, wherein the discharging portion is arranged adjacent to the movable body.

According to the above configuration, since the movable body (ball entry part) and the discharge part are close to each other, it is possible to visually confirm whether the game ball has entered the ball entry part or the discharge part without moving the line of sight. It is possible to consolidate the points of interest. As a result, it is possible to suppress the distraction of attention as compared with the case where the visual recognition of various parts is required, and the player can easily concentrate on the game.

When this feature is applied to the above feature D11, the discharge part and the ball entry part are brought close to each other, so that the game ball enters the discharge part while making it appear as if the game ball has entered the ball entry part. It is expected to have the effect of making the ball ball and making the discharge less noticeable.

Feature D13. The gaming machine according to feature D12, wherein the distance between the discharging portion and the movable body is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the game ball from falling downward from between the movable body and the discharging unit, and to eliminate the need for a separate guide path for guiding the game ball from the movable body to the discharging unit. Can be done. As a result, the configuration for guiding the gaming ball to the discharging unit becomes simple, and the optimum configuration can be achieved in a gaming machine in which the gaming area is limited.

When this feature is applied to the above feature D11, "For example, if the game ball is configured to fall between the movable body and the discharging portion, the player can see how the game ball spills from the movable body. As a result of visual recognition, it may be easy to give the impression that the game ball is likely to spill. In this respect, in this configuration, the game ball is prevented from falling between the movable body and the discharging portion, so that the player can see it. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to give an impression that it is easy to spill, and it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in the motivation to play. "

Feature D14. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation, and
The first entry section (large winning opening 202, large winning opening 302, second winning opening portion 404) and the second entry section (out openings 141, 171) provided in the game area where the game ball can enter. When,
The first state (open state) in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter in the first entry portion, and the game ball cannot enter the first entry portion or enters the ball more than in the first state. A movable body (shutter 216, opening / closing door 305, second opening / closing plate 433) that can be switched between a difficult second state (closed state) and
A switching control means (opening / closing of a large winning opening by the main control device 81) for executing switching control for changing the movable body from the second state to the first state and then changing to the second state based on a predetermined opportunity. Function to execute processing) and
A privilege granting means (payout control device 97) capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the entry of a game ball into the first entry unit, and
Equipped with
The second ball entry portion is arranged on the side of the movable body when viewed from the front of the game machine, and is configured to open to the movable body side.

In the above configuration, since the second ball entry portion is arranged on the side of the movable body and the second ball entry portion opens on the movable body side, not only the front view from the front of the gaming machine but also from the front of the gaming machine. Even when looking down, the visibility of the second ball entry portion can be reduced. Further, in the above configuration, since the game ball can be smoothly entered into the second entry portion by using the momentum of the game ball flowing toward the side of the movable body, the periphery of the second entry portion. The flow of the game ball is stagnant, the ball is clogged, and so on. From the above, it is possible to allow the game ball to enter the second entry portion while making it inconspicuous.

In addition, each configuration described in any of the above features D1 to D13 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

For each configuration of the above features D1 to D14, any of features A1 to A20, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C19, features E1 to E16, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H7. It is possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic E group>
Features E1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation, and
A first ball entry section (second winning opening section 404, lower large winning opening 506) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball,
A second ball entry portion (first winning opening portion 403, upper large winning opening 505) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball, and
A privilege granting means (payout control device 97) capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the entry of a game ball into each entry portion of the first entry portion and the second entry portion.
A first state (closed state) in which the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry section are closed, which are provided corresponding to the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section, and the first state. A movable body (opening / closing member 431) that can be switched between a second state (open state A) in which the ball entry portion is in the open state and a third state (open state B) in which the second ball entry portion is in the open state. ,
A switching control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for switching and controlling the movable body, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, the first state in which both the first and second ball entry portions are closed, the second state in which the first ball entry section is open, and the second ball entry section are open. The configuration is such that it can be switched to the third state. For this reason, it is possible to diversify the entry mode of the game ball and improve the interest of the game, as compared with a uniform game in which only one entry portion contains the game ball. Moreover, since such switching is realized by one movable body, there is a possibility that the first ball entry portion will be in the open state and the second ball entry section will be in the open state when the movement of the movable body is started. Can give rise to both the possibility of becoming. As a result, it is possible to add fun to predict which entry portion will be in the open state, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature E2. The switching control means provides means for allowing the movable body to pass through the second state when the movable body switches from the first state to the third state (a function of switching to the open state A via the open state B). The gaming machine according to feature E1, which is characterized by being provided.

In the above configuration, when the movable body is switched from the first state to the third state, the behavior of the movable body up to the middle can be matched with the behavior when the movable body is switched from the first state to the second state. During the period when the behavior of the movable body matches, it is not determined from the player's point of view whether it will be in the second state or the third state. This is avoided, and it is advantageous in ensuring the fun of predicting which ball entry portion will be in the open state.

It should be noted that the present feature is "the switching control means includes a first means for switching the movable body to the second state and a second means for switching the movable body to the third state, and the second means is used. It is characterized in that it is possible to pass through the second state when the movable body is switched to the third state. "

Feature E3. The switching control means is a means for making the period of the second state shorter than the period of the third state when the movable body switches to the third state via the second state. The gaming machine according to the feature E2, which is characterized by having.

For example, when the movable body switches to the third state via the second state, if the period of the second state is longer than the period of the third state, the movable body enters the first ball entry portion. The sphere is likely to occur, and the difference from the case where the movable body switches to the second state may be ambiguous. In this respect, according to this configuration, the probability of the game ball entering the first ball entry portion can be suppressed to a low level even though the configuration is such that the second state is passed through, and the movable body is switched to the second state. Appropriate differentiation is possible.

Feature E4. When the movable body is in the second state, the second ball entry portion is closed.
The switching control means is
A first means for switching the movable body to the second state (a function of switching the opening / closing member 431 to the open state A) and
A second means for switching the movable body to the third state (a function of switching the opening / closing member 431 to the open state B) and
Equipped with
When the movable body is switched to the second state by the first means and then the movable body is switched to the third state by the second means, the movable body is not switched to the first state. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, which is characterized in that it has a configuration capable of switching to three states.

According to the above configuration, after the movable body is in the second state, it is configured to shift to the third state without returning to the first state, so that the period required for switching to the third state can be shortened. , Quick state switching is possible. Further, by not interposing the first state in which both the first ball entry part and the second ball entry part are closed between the second state and the third state, the game ball can be placed in the first ball entry part and the first ball entry part. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the ball does not enter any of the two entry sections, and to realize efficient entry (privilege acquisition).

Feature E5. A game state transition means (by the main control device 81) for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) capable of executing the round game in which the switching control is performed a plurality of times under a predetermined condition (a result of a big hit). Equipped with a function to execute the game state transition process)
In the special gaming state, when the movable body is switched to the second state by the first means in the previous round game, and then the movable body is switched to the third state by the second means in the later round game. The gaming machine according to feature E4, wherein the movable body can be switched to the third state without switching to the first state.

According to the above configuration, the waiting period between the first round game and the later round game can be eliminated or extremely shortened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the game ball does not enter either the first entry section or the second entry section, and it is possible to promote efficient entry (privilege acquisition). Become. In addition, the special game state can be advanced at a good tempo, and the time efficiency when playing the game can be improved. In this feature, the "later round game" may be paraphrased as the "next round game".

Feature E6. A game state transition means (by the main control device 81) for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) capable of executing the round game in which the switching control is performed a plurality of times under a predetermined condition (a result of a big hit). Equipped with a function to execute the game state transition process)
The switching control means is
A first means (a function of switching the opening / closing member 431 to the open state A) for performing a first switching control for switching the movable body to the second state, and
A second means (a function of switching the opening / closing member 431 to the open state B) for performing a second switching control for switching the movable body to the third state, and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E5, characterized in that the first switching control and the second switching control can be executed in the round game.

According to the above configuration, since the ball entry portion that is easy to enter changes in one round game, it is expected that the player carefully observes the behavior of the movable body, and the degree of attention to the game is suitably increased. Will be possible. In addition, it is possible to diversify the flow of the game ball and the mode of entering the ball, and to improve the fun of the game, as compared with the uniform game in which only the game ball enters one entry section. Become.

It should be noted that the game state transition means for shifting this feature to a special game state (open / close execution mode) in which the round game in which the switching control is performed can be executed a plurality of times under a predetermined condition (a result of a big hit). (A function to execute a game state transition process by the main control device 81), in one round game, switching of the movable body to the second state and switching of the movable body to the third state. It is characterized by having a configuration capable of executing. "

Feature E7. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the movable body can be switched to a fourth state in which the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion are in an open state. ..

In the above configuration, there is a fourth state in which the ball can enter both the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section. In the second and third states, the player can predict to some extent which entry portion the game ball will enter from the state of the movable body, but in the fourth state, such prediction becomes difficult. .. By including such a state in the switching mode of the movable body, it is expected that the player's interest in the flow (whereabouts) of the game ball will be further increased, and the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased. become.

Feature E8. When the movable body switches from the second state to the third state, the period in which the movable body is in the second state and the period in which the movable body is in the third state can overlap. The gaming machine according to feature E7, wherein the movable body is in the fourth state at least during the overlapping period.

According to the above configuration, the fourth state can be generated during the switching from the second state to the third state, and the first state is compared with the case where only the switching from the second state to the third state is performed. It is possible to complicate the entry mode of the game ball of the entry section and the second entry section, and the interest is improved.

Feature E9. The movable body is provided with respect to the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion so as to be in the first state at a predetermined position.
When the movable body is displaced from the predetermined position in the first direction, the second state is obtained, while when the movable body is displaced from the predetermined position in a second direction different from the first direction, the third state is obtained. The gaming machine according to feature E1, which is characterized in that it is configured in.

According to the above configuration, which entry portion is in the open state changes depending on the displacement direction of the movable body from a predetermined position, so that the player's interest in the direction in which the movable body is displaced increases. Conceivable. Therefore, it is expected that the player pays close attention to the behavior of the movable body, and it becomes possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

In this feature, the "first direction" and "second direction" are referred to as "first direction" and "second direction", "first direction of travel" and "second direction of travel", or "first direction", respectively. It may be paraphrased as "side" and "second side".

Feature E10. The gaming machine according to feature E9, wherein the second direction is a direction opposite to the first direction.

According to the above configuration, by making the movable body reciprocating, it is possible to realize each switching from the first state to the second state and from the first state to the third state, and the configuration is simplified. It becomes possible to plan. Further, since the displacement direction in the second state and the displacement direction in the third state are opposite to each other, there is an advantage that the difference in the displacement direction of the movable body can be easily understood from the player's point of view.

Feature E11. Means for differentiating the degree of advantage for the player between the case where the game ball enters the first ball entry section and the case where the game ball enters the second ball entry section (the effect control device 82 executes the notification effect control process). It is characterized by having a function of differently paying out the number of game balls depending on whether the game ball wins in the upper large winning opening 505 and the game ball wins in the lower large winning opening 506). The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E10.

According to the above configuration, not only the entry part where the game ball is easy to enter is switched, but also the joy of the player is different depending on whether the game ball enters the first entry part or the second entry part. be able to. Therefore, it is expected that not only the player pays more attention to the behavior of the movable body, but also the fun of predicting the ball entry portion to be in the open state increases.

Feature E12. Means for making the player more advantageous when the game ball enters the first ball entry section than when the game ball enters the second ball entry section (notification effect control process by the effect control device 82). It is characterized by having a function to execute, and a function to pay out more game balls when a game ball wins in the lower big prize opening 506 than when a game ball wins in the upper big prize opening 505). Features The gaming machine according to E11.

According to the above configuration, when the game ball enters the first entry section, it is more advantageous than the case where the game ball enters the second entry section, so that the entry into the first entry section is realized. You can increase the joy of doing so. As a result, it is possible to significantly increase the interest in which entry portion the game ball enters, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature E13. The privilege granting means
A first privilege granting means capable of granting a first privilege to a player based on the entry of a game ball into the second entry portion,
A second privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry portion.
The gaming machine according to the feature E12, characterized in that the machine is equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, a second benefit that is more advantageous than the first benefit granted based on the entry into the second entry section is granted. Therefore, it is possible to increase the joy when the ball enters the first ball entry portion. As a result, it is possible to significantly increase the interest in which entry portion the game ball enters, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature E14. A special game state transition means (main control device 81) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that causes at least one of the second state and the third state based on a predetermined specific trigger (big hit result). (Function to execute the game state transition process) and
In the case of a predetermined game result (when the jackpot type is divided into 15R normal jackpot results), the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is set to the first gaming state (low probability mode), and the predetermined game state is set. In the case of a game result different from the game result (when the jackpot type is assigned to the unspecified probability variation 15R jackpot result), the game state after the end of the special game state is different from the first game state in the second game state. (A function to execute the transition process (step S412) at the end of the open / close execution mode by the main control device 81)
Equipped with
The switching control means is the number of times the special gaming state is changed to the second state or the third state when the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is set to the first gaming state by the state means. The switching control is executed so that the probability that the number of times becomes larger than the predetermined number of times is different from the case where the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is set to the second gaming state by the state means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E13, which comprises means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to add fun to guess the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state from the number of times the movable body is in the second state or the number of times in the third state in the special gaming state. As a result, the player's interest in the behavior of the movable body is greatly increased, and the degree of attention to the game can be suitably improved. In this feature, the "probability" includes 0%, and the "predetermined number of times" includes 0 times.

Feature E15. A special game state transition means (game by the main control device 81) for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) in which a round game can be executed multiple times based on a predetermined specific opportunity (a result of a big hit). Function to execute state transition processing) and
In the case of a predetermined game result (when the jackpot type is divided into 15R normal jackpot results), the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is set to the first gaming state (low probability mode), and the predetermined game state is set. In the case of a game result different from the game result (when the jackpot type is assigned to the unspecified probability variation 15R jackpot result), the game state after the end of the special game state is different from the first game state in the second game state. (A function to execute the transition process (step S412) at the end of the open / close execution mode by the main control device 81)
Equipped with
When the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is set to the first gaming state by the state means, the switching control means becomes the second state in a predetermined round game in the special gaming state. A means for executing the switching control so that the probability or the probability of becoming the third state is different from the case where the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is set to the second gaming state by the state means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E13, which is characterized by being provided.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to add fun to guess the game state after the end of the special game state from the state of the movable body in the predetermined round game. As a result, the player's interest in the behavior of the movable body is greatly increased, and the degree of attention to the game can be suitably improved. In addition, since it is sufficient to pay attention to the behavior of the movable body in the predetermined round game, the game is compared with the case where all the round games performed in the special game state are targeted or the round game to be noted is not determined. The load on the person can be reduced. In this feature, the "probability" includes 0%.

Feature E16. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation, and
A first ball entry section (second winning opening section 404, lower large winning opening 506) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball,
A second ball entry portion (first winning opening portion 403, upper large winning opening 505) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball, and
A single opening / closing means (opening / closing member 431) provided corresponding to the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section and capable of opening / closing the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section.
An opening / closing control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for controlling the opening / closing means to operate in a predetermined operation mode, and
Means for making the degree of advantage for the player different between the case where the game ball enters the first entry portion and the case where the game ball enters the second entry portion (the means for the game ball to the second winning opening portion 404). A function to execute a notification effect based on a prize, a function to make the number of game balls paid out different depending on whether a game ball wins in the upper large prize opening 505 and a game ball wins in the lower large prize opening 506). ,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, switching of the open / closed state of the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion is realized by one opening / closing means. That is, since the ball entry portion and the opening / closing means have a many-to-one correspondence, when the opening / closing means operates, the ball entry portion that switches to the open state is not uniquely determined, and any of the ball entry portions is in the open state. It is possible to give fun to predict whether or not. Moreover, since the degree of advantage for the player differs between the entry into the first entry section and the entry into the second entry section, it is of great interest to the player which entry section is in the open state. It becomes a matter. As a result, it is expected that the player will be more interested in the behavior of the opening / closing means, and it will be possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, each configuration described in any one of the above-mentioned features E1 to E15 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

For each configuration of the above features E1 to E16, any of features A1 to A20, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D14, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H7. It is possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation, and
A ball entry portion (first winning opening portion 403, large winning opening 202) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball,
An open state (open state) in which a game ball can or easily enters the ball entry portion, which is provided corresponding to the entry portion, and an open state in which the game ball cannot enter the ball entry portion or the open state. Movable bodies (opening and closing members 631, 731) that can be switched to a closed state (closed state) that makes it harder to enter the ball,
A switching control means (a large winning opening opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for executing a switching control of changing the movable body from the closed state to the open state and then changing the movable body to the closed state based on a predetermined specific trigger. Function to execute) and
A privilege granting means (payout control device 97) capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
Equipped with
A ball receiving portion (second surface portion 658 of the movable plate 651, upper surface portion 732a of the shutter portion 732) capable of receiving a game ball flowing down the game area is provided in a situation where the movable body is at least in the closed state. Has been
The ball receiving portion has a configuration capable of moving the game ball received by the ball receiving portion in a predetermined direction (direction toward the out openings 141 and 171).
A game characterized by having a variable means (a function of switching between a closed state A and a closed state B) capable of changing the ease of movement of a game ball in the ball receiving portion in the predetermined direction. Machine.

In the above configuration, since the privilege is given to the game ball based on the entry of the game ball into the entry section, the player can use the game ball in the entry section when the movable body is in the open state. You can enjoy whether or not the ball enters. In addition, in the above configuration, the ball receiving portion capable of receiving the game ball in the closed state of the movable body is provided, and the ease of movement of the game ball in the predetermined direction on the ball receiving portion is made. It is possible to change. Therefore, when the movable body is in the closed state, the flow of the game ball on the ball receiving portion is diversified, and the movement of the game ball can be changed. As a result, the player's attention can be attracted to the behavior of the game ball not only when the movable body is in the open state but also when the movable body is in the closed state, and the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased. It will be possible.

Further, this configuration has an advantage that the range of game design can be expanded by making it possible to change the ease of moving the game ball in a predetermined direction on the ball receiving portion. That is, in the design of the gaming machine, for example, when it is desirable that the gaming ball is difficult to move on the ball receiving portion under a certain situation, if the ball receiving portion has a structure in which the gaming ball is difficult to move, the action is the whole game. It will be exhibited in the above, and there is a risk that it will affect other situations. In this respect, according to this configuration, it is possible to properly use the ease of movement according to the situation even in the same closed state, and it is possible to relax the restrictions on the game design. As a result, it is possible to promote the realization of a more entertaining gaming machine.

Feature F2. The feature F1 is described in the feature F1 which is characterized in that when the movable body switches from the closed state to the open state, the gaming ball received by the ball receiving portion can enter the ball entering portion. Gaming machine.

In the above configuration, when the movable body is switched from the closed state to the open state, the game ball is placed on the ball receiving portion, so that the game ball can enter the ball entry portion. In this case, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion under the closed state has a higher probability of entering the ball receiving portion as the staying period on the ball receiving portion is longer. Therefore, by changing the ease of moving the game ball in a predetermined direction on the ball receiving portion, that is, the ease of passing through the ball receiving portion, for example, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion can be inserted. It is possible to create a special state in which it is easy to enter the ball part separately from the state in which it is not, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Feature F3. The first ball entry part as the ball entry part and
A second ball entry section (second winning opening section 404) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball,
Equipped with
The privilege granting means is a means capable of granting a privilege to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion (a prize ball based on the winning of the game ball to the second prize opening portion 404). Equipped with a function to pay out)
The feature F1 is characterized in that when the movable body is switched from the open state to the closed state, the gaming ball received by the ball receiving portion can enter the second entering portion. The described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the same effect as that of the above feature F2 can be obtained. In addition, in the above configuration, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion can enter the second entry portion instead of the first entry portion. For example, if the game ball received by the ball receiving portion is configured to enter the first ball receiving portion, the ball enters due to the movable body being in the first state (not via the ball receiving portion). Since the entry destination of the game ball is the same as that of the ball entering in (when entering the ball in), it may be difficult for the gaming machine to identify which route the ball entered. In this respect, in this configuration, since the entry destination of the game ball is different depending on whether the ball is entered through the ball receiving portion or without the ball receiving portion, the ball is entered by any route in the gaming machine. Can be easily identified. For this reason, for example, it becomes easy to differentiate between the former case and the latter case by providing a difference in the degree of advantage, which is advantageous in evoking a special feeling for entering the ball through the ball receiving portion. Can be.

Features F4. The game state has a first game state (open / close execution mode) in which the switching control is executed and a second game state (normal game state) in which the switching control is not executed.
The variable means is
The ease of movement of the game ball in the predetermined direction in the ball receiving portion is determined by the first state (closed state A) in which the game ball is relatively easy to move and the second state in which the game ball is relatively difficult to move. It is possible to switch to (closed state B),
It is characterized by having a state changing means (a function of setting the closed state B in at least one round game of the opening / closing execution mode) so as to be in the second state for at least a part of the period of the first gaming state. Features The gaming machine according to F2 or F3.

According to the above configuration, in the first game state in which switching control is performed, the staying period of the game ball on the ball receiving portion is prolonged, and as a result, the ball entering through the ball receiving portion is under the first gaming state. It is more likely to occur in. As a result, the interest is enhanced and it becomes possible to appropriately arouse the motivation to play.

In this feature, "the game state has a first game state (open / close execution mode) in which the switching control is executed and a second game state (normal game state) in which the switching control is not executed." "A lottery means (a function of executing a winning / failing lottery by the main control device 81) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the lottery result of the lottery means are described above. A game is provided with a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for shifting the game state to the special game state when the result corresponds to the occurrence of the special game state. When the state shifts to the special gaming state, the switching control is executed by the switching control means. ”In other words, the“ first gaming state ”and the“ second gaming state ”are“ It may be paraphrased as "special game state" and "normal game state". Further, "the switching control is executed" may be rephrased as "the switching control is executed a plurality of times".

Feature F5. The gaming machine according to feature F4, wherein the state changing means is set to the first state when the second gaming state is reached.

According to the above configuration, under the second gaming state in which the switching control is not executed, the flow of the game ball on the ball receiving portion is smoothed, and the ball clogging in the ball receiving portion and its peripheral region is suppressed. Thereby, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to enter through the ball receiving portion in the first gaming state while avoiding the influence on the second gaming state.

Feature F6. It is characterized by being provided in the game area and provided with a discharge unit (out ports 141, 171) capable of discharging a game ball that has passed through the ball receiving unit by moving in the predetermined direction from the game area. The gaming machine according to the feature F5.

In the second game state, in addition to the switching control not being executed, the flow of the game ball in the ball receiving part is smoothed, so that the game balls pass through the ball receiving part one after another and the ball receiving part. It becomes easy for game balls to collect on the downstream side of. In this respect, in this configuration, since the game ball that has passed through the ball receiving portion can be appropriately discharged from the game area, the game ball accumulates on the downstream side of the ball receiving portion, the flow of the game ball is stagnant, or the ball is clogged. It is possible to suppress such things.

Feature F7. The gaming machine according to any one of features F4 to F6, wherein the state changing means is configured to execute switching to the second state in response to execution of the switching control.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to switch to the second state by performing the switching control, and to have a configuration suitable for setting the second state in the first gaming state. In this feature, the configuration of "maintaining the state immediately before the switching control when the switching control is not executed" may be further limited.

Feature F8. As the switching control, the first switching control in which the switching control is performed in a predetermined predetermined mode (the mode of FIGS. 49 (a) to (e) and the mode of FIG. 52 (a)) and the predetermined mode. It has a second switching control in which the switching control is performed in a mode different from that (a mode of FIGS. 49 (e) to 49 (g), a mode of FIG. 52 (b)).
The state changing means is provided with means for making the second state when the first switching control is executed and the first state when the second switching control is executed. Characteristic Feature The gaming machine according to any one of F4 to F7.

According to the above configuration, since the mode of switching control of the movable body and the state of the ball receiving portion correspond to each other, the player who is interested in which of the first state and the second state is to move the movable body. It is considered to be watched, and it becomes possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game. Further, when the switching control is executed a plurality of times in the first gaming state, the first state and the second state are controlled by controlling which of the first switching control and the second switching control is performed in each switching control. It is possible to control which of these is used, and it is possible to diversify the pattern of state switching. Further, by setting the final switching control in the first gaming state to the second switching control, the second gaming state can be started in the state of returning to the first state. As a result, it becomes difficult for the game ball to pass through the ball receiving portion in the second game state, and it is possible to suppress the inconvenience of inducing ball clogging or the like.

Features F9. The first position (the position of the closed state A in FIG. 48 (a), the position of the closed state A in FIG. 52 (a)) and the first position (the position of the closed state A in FIG. 48 (a)) forming a part of the movable body or receiving the power of the movable body. A specific body (movable plate 651, extension portion 735) that can operate at a second position (position of closed state B in FIG. 48 (b), position of closed state B in FIG. 52 (b)) different from one position. Equipped with
The features F4 to F8 characterized in that the specific body is placed in the first position to be in the first state, and the specific body is placed in the second position to be in the second state. The gaming machine described in either.

According to the above configuration, a specific body that operates in conjunction with the movement of the movable body is provided, and the ease of movement of the game ball in the predetermined direction at the ball receiving portion can be changed by the positional displacement of the specific body. It is possible to eliminate the need for a dedicated drive unit for various controls and ball receiving units.

Feature F10. The ball receiving portion has a first ball receiving surface (upper surface portion 433b of the second opening / closing plate 433) and a second ball receiving surface (second surface portion of the movable plate 651) having different easiness of moving the game ball in the predetermined direction. The second ball receiving surface has a structure in which the game ball is less likely to move in the predetermined direction than the first ball receiving surface.
The first state is to receive a game ball on the first ball receiving surface, and the second state is to receive a game ball on the second ball receiving surface. Features F4 to F8. The gaming machine described in any of.

According to the above configuration, switching between the first state and the second state can be realized by switching the ball receiving surface, which is a practically preferable embodiment for realizing the configuration of any of the above features F4 to F8. Can be done. Further, by changing the state by such surface switching, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize which of the first state and the second state is.

Features F11. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation, and
A ball entry portion (first winning opening portion 403, large winning opening 202) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball,
An open state (open state) in which a game ball can or easily enters the ball entry portion, which is provided corresponding to the entry portion, and an open state in which the game ball cannot enter the ball entry portion or the open state. Movable bodies (opening and closing members 631, 731) that can be switched to a closed state (closed state) that makes it harder to enter the ball,
A switching control means (a large winning opening opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for executing a switching control of changing the movable body from the closed state to the open state and then changing the movable body to the closed state based on a predetermined specific trigger. Function to execute) and
A privilege granting means (payout control device 97) capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
The first position (the position of the closed state A in FIG. 48 (a), the position of the closed state A in FIG. 52 (a)) and the first position (the position of the closed state A in FIG. 48 (a)) forming a part of the movable body or receiving the power of the movable body. A specific body (movable plate 651, extension portion 735) that can operate at a second position (position of closed state B in FIG. 48 (b), position of closed state B in FIG. 52 (b)) different from one position. When,
In a situation where the movable body is at least in the closed state, it is possible to receive a game ball flowing down the game area, and the ease of movement of the received game ball in a predetermined direction is different from the first state and the first state. A ball receiving portion that can be switched between the two states (second surface portion 658 of the movable plate 651, upper surface portion 732a of the shutter portion 732) and
Equipped with
The ball receiving portion is characterized in that the specific body is placed in the first position to be in the first state, and the specific body is placed in the second position to be in the second state. A game machine to play.

According to the above configuration, the same effect as that of the above feature A1 can be obtained. In addition, it is equipped with a specific body that operates in conjunction with the movement of the movable body, and the ease of movement of the game ball in the predetermined direction at the ball receiving portion can be changed by the positional displacement of the specific body. It is possible to eliminate the need for a dedicated drive unit for the ball receiving unit.

In addition, each configuration described in any one of the above-mentioned features F1 to F10 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Feature F12. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation, and
An open state (open state) in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the open state, which are provided in the game area. Variable ball entry means (variable winning devices 201, 401) that can be switched to
The variable ball entry control means (by the main control device 81) that executes the variable ball entry control that changes the variable ball entry means from the closed state to the open state and then changes the ball entry control to the closed state based on a predetermined specific trigger. Function to execute the opening and closing process of the big prize opening) and
A privilege giving means (payout control device 97) capable of giving a privilege to a player based on the entry of a game ball into the variable entry means, and
Equipped with
The variable ball entry means has a plurality of modes in which the closed state includes a predetermined first mode (closed state A) and a second mode different from the first mode (closed state B). It is possible to switch,
When the variable ball entry means is changed from the open state to the closed state, the variable ball entry control means sets the closed state of the variable ball entry means to any one of the plurality of modes. Equipped with mode control means (function to switch between closed state A and closed state B)
A gaming machine characterized in that the degree of advantage for a player differs depending on whether the closed state of the variable ball-entry means is the first aspect or the second aspect.

According to the above configuration, the closed state has a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode, and when the variable ball entry means is closed, any one of the plurality of modes is used. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to add fun to enjoy in which mode the variable ball entry means is closed, and it is more interesting than a uniform game in which the variable ball entry means is simply opened and closed. It will be possible to improve. Moreover, since the degree of advantage for the player differs depending on whether the closed state is the first mode or the second mode, there is a strong interest in which mode the variable ball entry means is closed. It can be turned away, and it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, each configuration described in any one of the above-mentioned features F1 to F11 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

For each configuration of the above features F1 to F12, any of features A1 to A20, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D14, features E1 to E16, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H7. It is possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation, and
A passage forming body (opening / closing member 431) provided in the game area and capable of forming a passage portion of the game ball, and
Equipped with
In the passage forming body, a predetermined surface (upper surface portion 483b of the second opening / closing plate 483) of the passage forming body faces upward, and the predetermined surface constitutes a floor portion of the passage portion (FIG. 42 (a). ) And the second position where the game ball on the floor can be dropped downward (the opening / closing member 431 in the open state B in FIG. 42B). It is possible to rotate to (rotation position)
On the predetermined surface of the passage forming body, an upright portion (first opening / closing plate 432) that stands upward when the passage forming body is in the first position and extends in the passage direction of the passage forming body. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with.

According to the above configuration, the rotation of the passage forming body causes the game ball on the passage portion to fall and flow down below the passage forming body, while the standing portion causes a new game ball to move below the passage forming body. It is possible to suppress the inflow to. As a result, the opportunity for the game ball to flow down below the passage forming body can be limited, and the joy when the game ball falls can be increased. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the standing portion is separated from the rotating tip portion of the predetermined surface by a diameter of a gaming ball or more.

According to the above configuration, when the passage forming body is in the first position, the game ball can be placed in front of the standing portion on the predetermined surface, and when the passage forming body is rotated to the second position, from the predetermined surface. It is possible to prevent the falling of the game ball from being hindered by the standing portion. That is, it is possible to achieve both the function of dropping the game ball received on the predetermined surface and the function of suppressing the further fall of the game ball.

Feature G3. The gaming machine according to feature G2, wherein the upright portion is provided at an end portion of the predetermined surface opposite to the rotating tip.

According to the above configuration, the effect of the feature G2 can be enhanced, and the optimum configuration can be used to realize the configuration of the feature G2.

Features G4. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, wherein the upright portion extends over the entire length of the predetermined surface in the passage direction.

According to the above configuration, when the passage forming body is in the second position, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the side of the standing portion and flowing into the lower part of the passage forming body, and the gaming ball below the passage forming body can be suppressed. It can be a preferred embodiment in limiting the inflow opportunity.

Feature G5. In a situation where the passage forming body is in the first position, a predetermined space portion (first winning opening portion 403 and first ball passage 405) is provided on the rear side of the gaming machine of the standing portion. Features The gaming machine according to any one of G1 to G4.

When the passage forming body is in the second position, the game ball is placed on the standing portion, and when the passage forming body rotates to the first position in that state, the game ball is placed between the standing portion and the object behind the standing portion. There is a risk of pinching and ball biting. In this respect, in this configuration, since the space portion is provided behind the standing portion, the game ball on the standing portion can be released to the space portion, and the occurrence of ball biting can be suppressed.

Feature G6. The gaming machine according to feature G5, wherein the space portion can accommodate one or more gaming balls.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of ball biting.

Feature G7. The gaming machine according to feature G6, which comprises a guiding means (first ball passage 405) capable of guiding the gaming ball that has entered the space to another region.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress the accumulation of game balls in the space portion, and it is possible to more preferably suppress the occurrence of ball biting.

Feature G8. It is provided in the game area and includes a first entry portion (out openings 141, 171) and a second entry portion (second winning opening portion 404) into which a game ball can enter.
The game ball that has passed through the passage portion can enter the first entry portion, while the game ball that has fallen from the passage portion can enter the second entry portion.
The features G1 to the feature G1 to be characterized in that the case where the game ball enters the second entry portion is more advantageous to the player than the case where the game ball enters the first entry portion. The gaming machine described in any of G7.

According to the above configuration, it is more advantageous for the player to drop the game ball on the way than to cross the passage part, so that the rotation of the passage forming body is performed while the game ball is moving in the passage part. It is possible to suitably arouse the expectation that it will occur. In addition, it is assumed that the player will be more interested in the behavior of the game ball and the passage forming body, and it will be possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature G9. While the privilege can be given based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry section, the configuration is such that there is no opportunity to give the privilege based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry section. The gaming machine according to the feature G8.

According to the above configuration, since the first ball entry section and the second entry section are differentiated depending on whether or not the privilege is given, it is possible to further arouse the expectation that the game ball will fall from the passage section. It is possible to enhance the effect of the above-mentioned feature G2.

Feature G10. When the passage forming body is in the first position, the passage portion covers the game ball flow path (passage portion 408) downward of the passage forming body from above, while the passage forming body covers the second passage forming body. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G9, characterized in that the standing portion covers the gaming ball flow path from above when the game ball is in a position.

According to the above configuration, regardless of whether the passage forming body is in the first position or the second position, the game ball flow path downward of the passage forming body is covered from above, so that the first position and the second position are covered. Both of these can regulate the inflow of the game ball into the game ball flow path. As a result, the opportunity for the game ball to flow into the game ball flow path is limited to the process in which the passage forming body rotates from the first position to the second position (when switching from the first position to the second position), and the game ball. Can increase the joy when the ball flows into the game ball flow path.

Feature G11. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation, and
A passage forming body (opening / closing member 431) provided in the game area and capable of forming a passage portion of the game ball, and
Equipped with
In the passage forming body, a predetermined surface (upper surface portion 483b of the second opening / closing plate 483) of the passage forming body faces upward, and the predetermined surface constitutes a floor portion of the passage portion (FIG. 42 (a). ) And the second position where the game ball on the floor can be dropped downward (the opening / closing member 431 in the open state B in FIG. 42B). It is possible to rotate to (rotation position)
A protruding portion (first opening / closing plate 432) that protrudes upward when the passage forming body is in the first position is provided on the predetermined surface of the passage forming body.
A gaming machine characterized in that the protruding portion is provided at an end portion of the predetermined surface opposite to the rotating tip of the passage forming body.

According to the above configuration, the rotation of the passage forming body causes the game ball on the passage portion to fall and flow down below the passage forming body, while the protruding portion causes a new game ball to move below the passage forming body. It is possible to suppress the inflow to. As a result, the opportunity for the game ball to flow down below the passage forming body can be limited, and the joy when the game ball falls can be increased. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, each configuration described in any one of the above-mentioned features G1 to G10 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

For each configuration of the above features G1 to G11, any of features A1 to A20, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D14, features E1 to E16, features F1 to F12, and features H1 to H7. It is possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation, and
The first starting ball entry portion (upper operating port 33) and the second starting ball entering portion (third operating port 803) provided in the game area,
A first information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for the upper operating port 33 by the main control device 81) to acquire special information based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry portion.
The first grant determination means (execution of the hit / fail determination process for the upper operating port 33 by the main control device 81) for performing the first grant determination as to whether or not the special information acquired by the first information acquisition means corresponds to the grant information. Function to do) and
A second information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for the third operating port 803 by the main control device 81) to acquire special information based on the entry of the game ball into the second start entry portion.
A second acquisition information storage means (holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the holding ball storage area 114b) that stores the special information acquired by the second information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of predetermined numbers.
A second grant determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the second information acquisition means corresponds to the grant information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the second information acquisition means. A second grant determination means (a function of the main control device 81 to execute a hit / fail determination process for the third actuation port 803) that sequentially performs the second grant determination for the plurality of special information.
A special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state when the determination result by the first grant determination means or the second grant determination means corresponds to the grant information. A gaming machine configured to transition to a state,
An open state (open state) in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the open state, which are provided in the game area. Variable ball entry means (variable winning device 802) that can be switched to
A privilege giving means (payout control device 97) capable of giving a privilege to a player based on the entry of a game ball into the variable entry means, and
Equipped with
When the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry means is changed from the closed state to the open state, and then the variable ball entry control to be changed to the closed state is executed.
The second grant determination is set to be more advantageous to the player than the first grant determination.
In the special gaming state, the game ball can enter the second starting ball entering portion or is easily entered in the first state, and in the normal gaming state, the gaming ball enters the second starting ball entering portion. The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a specific means (second opening / closing plate 433) for making it impossible to enter a ball or to enter a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state.

According to the above configuration, the ball entering the second starting ball entry portion corresponding to the second grant determination advantageous to the player is likely to occur or occur in the special gaming state in which the variable ball entry control is executed. , The player has the right not only to obtain the privilege grant by entering the variable ball entry means by shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state, but also to receive the second grant judgment on the advantageous side in the subsequent game. It will be possible to acquire. On the other hand, in the normal game state, the ball does not or is unlikely to enter the second starting ball entry portion, so that it is possible to suppress the game from being performed under conditions that are excessively advantageous for the player. As described above, according to this configuration, it is possible to add value to the special gaming state and improve the attractiveness of the special gaming state while avoiding the influence on the normal gaming state.

Feature H2. It is provided with a first acquisition information storage means (holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the holding ball storage area 114b) that stores the special information acquired by the first information acquisition means up to a predetermined first predetermined number. ,
The first grant determination means has a configuration in which the first grant determination is performed based on the special information stored in the first information acquisition means.
Obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the second start entry section rather than the first grant determination regarding the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first start entry section. Described in feature H1 characterized by having a priority means (a function of executing data setting processing by the main control device 81) capable of preferentially executing the second grant determination for the special information to be performed. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, since the second grant determination is prioritized over the first grant determination, the special information corresponding to the entry into the first starting entry section at the end of the special gaming state and the first 2 Even if both the special information corresponding to the entry into the starting ball entry portion is stored, the second grant determination on the advantageous side is preferentially performed. As a result, even though the ball is entered into the second starting ball entry portion in the special game state, the first grant determination on the disadvantageous side may be performed before the second grant determination in the game after the end. It is suppressed. When this feature is applied to the feature H1, the "predetermined number" in the second acquired information storage means can be paraphrased as the "second predetermined number".

Feature H3. The gaming machine according to feature H1 or H2, wherein the second starting ball entry portion is provided on the downstream side of the variable ball entry means in the gaming area.

For example, if the second starting ball entry portion is present on the upstream side of the variable entry means, the game ball does not reach the variable entry means due to the entry into the second start entry portion, and as a result, the game ball does not reach the variable entry means. There is a risk that entry into the variable entry means will be hindered. In this regard, in the above configuration, since the second starting ball entry portion is located on the downstream side of the variable entry means, the game ball that did not enter the variable entry means enters the second start entry portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the variable ball entry means from being hindered by the ball entering the second starting ball entry portion. This makes it possible to cause or facilitate the entry of the ball into the second starting entry section in the special gaming state while suppressing the influence of the entry situation into the variable entry means.

Features H4. The specific means restricts the game ball from flowing into the specific area (lower region of the variable winning device 802) in the normal gaming state, and the game ball enters the specific region in the special gaming state. A means for allowing inflow (second opening / closing plate 433) is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H3, characterized in that the gaming ball that has flowed into the specific region can enter the second starting ball entry portion.

According to the above configuration, a relatively simple configuration of switching whether or not to allow the inflow of the game ball to the specific area according to the game state causes the first state in the special game state, and the normal game state. In this case, the configuration in the second state can be realized, and it can be a practically preferable embodiment in realizing the configuration of the above-mentioned feature H1.

Feature H5. A third starting ball entering portion (lower operating port 34) provided in the game area and different from the first starting ball entering portion and the second starting ball entering portion.
The first aspect (open state of the electric accessory 34a) in which the game ball can be accepted or easily accepted in the third start ball entry portion, and the game ball cannot be accepted in the third start ball entry portion or more than in the first aspect. A receiving means (electric accessory 34a) that can be switched to the second mode (closed state of the electric accessory 34a) that is difficult to accept, and
The receiving means is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect, and then the acceptance control means (a function of executing the electric service support process by the main control device 81) for executing the acceptance control according to the second aspect, and
A passing portion (through gate 35) provided in the game area and through which a game ball can pass,
Acceptance information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for through by the main control device 81) to acquire acceptance information based on the passage of the game ball through the passing portion, and
Based on the acceptance information acquired by the acceptance information acquisition means, the acceptance determination means (main control device 81 performs an electric service opening lottery) that determines whether or not the acceptance control is executed by the acceptance control means. Function) and
Equipped with
The second information acquisition means is characterized in that it acquires special information based on the entry of a gaming ball into each starting entry section of the second starting entry section and the third starting entry section. The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H4.

According to the above configuration, since the third start ball entry unit corresponding to the second grant determination is provided in addition to the second start ball entry unit, it is possible to secure an opportunity to receive the second grant determination in the normal gaming state. become. Moreover, when the acceptance determination made based on the passage of the game ball to the passing portion has a predetermined result and the receiving means is switched to the first aspect, the game ball can or enters the third starting ball entry section. Since the configuration is easy, it is possible to prevent the frequency of entering the third starting ball from becoming excessively high in the normal gaming state. As a result, it is suppressed that the player is excessively advantageous, and the significance of providing the second starting ball entry portion is suppressed.

Feature H6. The specific means restricts the game ball from flowing into the specific area (lower region of the variable winning device 802) in the normal gaming state, and the game ball enters the specific region in the special gaming state. A means for allowing inflow (second opening / closing plate 433) is provided.
The game ball that has flowed into the specific area can enter the second starting ball entry portion.
The gaming machine according to feature H5, wherein the third starting ball entry portion is arranged on the upstream side of the specific region in the gaming region.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience that the inflow of the game ball into the specific area is restricted and even the entry of the game ball into the third starting ball entry portion is restricted. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second starting ball entry section while suppressing the influence of the ball entry status of the game ball into the third starting ball entry section. become.

Feature H7. The specific means includes a ball receiving means (second opening / closing plate 433) capable of receiving a game ball when the variable ball entering means is in the closed state.
The ball receiving means regulates the inflow of game balls below the ball receiving means when the variable ball receiving means is in the closed state, and the variable ball entering means changes from the closed state to the open state. Based on the fact that it can be switched, the game ball can be dropped downward from the ball receiving means.
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H6, characterized in that the gaming ball flowing into the lower part of the ball receiving means can enter the second starting ball entry portion.

According to the above configuration, by opening and closing the variable ball entry means with the transition to the special gaming state, switching to the first state in the special gaming state and the second state in the normal gaming state can be performed. It can be realized, and it can be a practically preferable embodiment in realizing the configuration of the above-mentioned feature H1.

For each configuration of the above features H1 to H7, any of features A1 to A20, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D14, features E1 to E16, features F1 to F12, and features G1 to G11. It is possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

In addition, the technical idea shown in each invention of each feature A to H group described above may be applied to each invention of each feature A to H group to each other, and some or all of them may be combined and each feature A to each feature A to H. It may be applied to each invention of group H. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each invention of each feature group A to H.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and grants a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Revolving gaming machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means. This is a special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine (ball-using spinning-type gaming machine): Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, which is caused by the operation of the starting operation means. The game starts with the fluctuation of the symbol, and the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or after a predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device that generates a special game state (bonus game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player, and further provides a ball tray to perform a throwing process of taking in the game ball from the ball tray, and paying out the game ball to the ball tray. A gaming machine provided with a payout device to be performed, and configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the game ball is thrown by the throwing device.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 31 ... General winning port, 33 ... Upper operating port, 34 ... Lower operating port, 97 ... Payout control device, 131 ... Left flow path forming part, 133 ... First inclined part, 136 ... Second inclined part , 141 ... Out port, 161 ... Right side flow path forming part, 163 ... First inclined part, 166 ... Second inclined part, 171 ... Out port, 201, 301, 401, 501, 802 ... Variable winning device, 321 ... Bottom Side out opening, 403 ... 1st winning opening, 404 ... 2nd winning opening, 431, 631, 731 ... Opening / closing member, 432 ... 1st opening / closing plate, 433 ... 2nd opening / closing plate, 651 ... Movable plate, 732 ... Shutter part, 735 ... Extension part, 803 ... Third actuating port.

Claims (1)

A launching means that can launch a game ball based on a predetermined launch operation,
The first and second ball entry means on which the game ball can enter, and the second ball entry means ,
The first state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter into the first ball entry means , and the second state in which the game ball can enter into the first entry means or is easier to enter than the first state. Movable body that can be switched to and
A switching control means for executing switching control in which the movable body is changed from the first state to the second state and then changed to the first state in a predetermined case.
Equipped with
It has a ball receiving means capable of receiving a game ball in a situation where the movable body is at least in the first state.
The second ball entry means is arranged in a predetermined area below the ball receiving means.
It is configured so that the entry of the game ball into the second entry means can be restricted in the situation where the movable body is in the first state.
When the movable body is switched from the first state to the second state in a situation where the ball receiving means receives the predetermined game ball, the predetermined game ball in the ball receiving means is the ball receiving means. It is configured so that it can flow downwards.
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined gaming ball that has flowed down below the ball receiving means can enter the second ball entering means .

Images